1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide...

300
Title page 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal (Formerly Metropolis® AMU) Release 1.0 through 6.0 Installation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 February 2017 Nokia – Proprietary and Confidential Use pursuant to applicable agreements Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Transcript of 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide...

Page 1: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Title page

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal (Formerly Metropolis® AMU)Release 1.0 through 6.0

Installation Guide

365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary and Confidential

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Page 2: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Legal notice

Nokia and Nokia logo are trademarks of Nokia. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

The information presented is subject to change without notice. Nokia assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.

Copyright © 2017 Nokia. All rights reserved.

Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Nokia and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside

Nokia without its written authorization.

Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.

Notice

Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However,information is subject to change.

Safety

Always observe the Safety Instructions given in Chapter 1 when operating the system.

Please note that Nokia Technologies warranty is contingent upon the use of Nokia Technologies specified SFPs for AMU. Use of other SFPs is not approved by Nokia Technologies and is fully at the customer’s own risk. Any warranty obligation ofNokia Technologies is extinguished when non-Nokia specified SFPs are used.

Ordering information

The order number of this document is 365-312-848R6.0 (Issue 2).

Technical support

Please contact your Nokia Local Customer Support Team (LCS) for technical questions about the information in this document.

License information for Open Source software

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU software contains open source software. For further details about handling/usage and licensing of thecontained/used open source software, please check 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU open source declaration files which are availableon the SW CD-ROMs.

Information product support

To comment on this information product, go to the Online Comment Form by visiting Nokia Support.

See notice on first page.

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

Page 3: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Contents

About this document

Purpose.......................................................................................................................................................................................... xixxix

Reason for revision.................................................................................................................................................................. xixxix

Safety information................................................................................................................................................................... xxvxxv

Intended audience.................................................................................................................................................................... xxvxxv

How to use this information product............................................................................................................................. xxvixxvi

Conventions used.................................................................................................................................................................. xxviixxvii

Related documentation...................................................................................................................................................... xxviiixxviii

Technical support.................................................................................................................................................................... xxixxxix

How to order ............................................................................................................................................................................ xxixxxix

How to comment.................................................................................................................................................................... xxixxxix

Part I: Physical and power installation

1 Safety

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11-1

General notes on safety

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-31-3

Structure of safety statements.............................................................................................................................................. 1-31-3

Basic safety aspects................................................................................................................................................................. 1-61-6

Specific safety areas

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-81-8

Laser safety................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-81-8

Power supply safety instructions...................................................................................................................................... 1-111-11

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

iii

Page 4: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Electrostatic discharge.......................................................................................................................................................... 1-111-11

Conformity statements......................................................................................................................................................... 1-131-13

2 General information

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-12-1

Hardware description.............................................................................................................................................................. 2-12-1

Environmental considerations........................................................................................................................................... 2-162-16

EMC/ESD information......................................................................................................................................................... 2-172-17

ITM-CIT requirements......................................................................................................................................................... 2-192-19

Required tools and test equipment.................................................................................................................................. 2-192-19

Sequence of steps................................................................................................................................................................... 2-202-20

3 Mechanical installation

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-13-1

1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installation

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-23-2

Technical data............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-23-2

Subrack installation.................................................................................................................................................................. 3-63-6

Main and tributary card installation............................................................................................................................... 3-103-10

AM/AMS option card installation................................................................................................................................... 3-213-21

Fan unit installation............................................................................................................................................................... 3-233-23

1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installation

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-253-25

Technical data.......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-253-25

Subrack installation............................................................................................................................................................... 3-293-29

Main and tributary card installation............................................................................................................................... 3-363-36

Fan unit installation............................................................................................................................................................... 3-453-45

4 System cabling

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-14-1

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

iv Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 5: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Power and ground cable installation

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-54-5

Power cables............................................................................................................................................................................... 4-54-5

Ground wiring ......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-104-10

External cable installation

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-134-13

MDI/O cables ......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-134-13

Station clock cable................................................................................................................................................................. 4-214-21

Q-LAN/G-LAN cable ........................................................................................................................................................... 4-264-26

ITM-CIT interface .................................................................................................................................................................. 4-284-28

V.11 cable (EOW).................................................................................................................................................................. 4-314-31

USB cable ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-334-33

Tributary and option card cabling

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-354-35

PI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75 option cards....................................................................................................................... 4-354-35

X2E3-V2/E3/DS3_E14 option cards.............................................................................................................................. 4-404-40

X16DS1 option card............................................................................................................................................................. 4-414-41

X2DS3-V2 option card........................................................................................................................................................ 4-444-44

X8PL and X4IP-V2 option cards.................................................................................................................................... 4-464-46

EPL4_E14 option card......................................................................................................................................................... 4-494-49

EPL4_E132_75 option card............................................................................................................................................... 4-514-51

ESW4_E14 option card....................................................................................................................................................... 4-534-53

EOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 option cards......................................................................................................... 4-534-53

SI-14/8 option card................................................................................................................................................................ 4-564-56

SFP cabling

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-574-57

SFP-155E cable....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-574-57

Optical interfaces.................................................................................................................................................................... 4-584-58

Fiber cables............................................................................................................................................................................... 4-614-61

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

v

Page 6: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

5 Powering

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-15-1

Physical installation check

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-25-2

Physical installation................................................................................................................................................................. 5-25-2

Cable connections..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-35-3

Power initialization

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-45-4

Switching on and testing supply voltage........................................................................................................................ 5-55-5

Physical and power installation exit checklist.............................................................................................................. 5-65-6

Part II: NE provisioning and stand alone installation test

6 ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-16-1

Software installation

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-26-2

Installing ITM-CIT ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-36-3

Installing the fast download application......................................................................................................................... 6-66-6

Fast NE software download................................................................................................................................................. 6-76-7

Connecting the ITM-CIT to the NE................................................................................................................................. 6-96-9

NE login procedure............................................................................................................................................................... 6-116-11

Provisioning system parameters

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-136-13

NE date and time................................................................................................................................................................... 6-146-14

Node creation........................................................................................................................................................................... 6-166-16

Slot provisioning .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-196-19

Confirm/Update the MIB.................................................................................................................................................... 6-216-21

7 Stand alone test procedures

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-17-1

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

vi Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 7: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Preparation and test of the AMU subrack...................................................................................................................... 7-37-3

Preparation of main card equipment protection........................................................................................................... 7-47-4

STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 port connection to optical distribution frame test..................................................... 7-57-5

Main card equipment protection test.............................................................................................................................. 7-107-10

PDH/DSx option card test.................................................................................................................................................. 7-137-13

Ethernet Private Line (EPL) option card test............................................................................................................. 7-167-16

Switched Ethernet option card test................................................................................................................................. 7-197-19

NE provisioning and stand alone installation test exit checklist........................................................................ 7-217-21

Part III: Link testing

8 Link testing

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-18-1

Optical received power test.................................................................................................................................................. 8-28-2

Connection verification test.................................................................................................................................................. 8-48-4

Transmission stability test..................................................................................................................................................... 8-68-6

Link testing exit checklist..................................................................................................................................................... 8-78-7

9 Conclusion

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-19-1

Power supply measurements................................................................................................................................................ 9-19-1

Optical output power measurements................................................................................................................................. 9-29-2

Final checklist............................................................................................................................................................................ 9-39-3

Completion form....................................................................................................................................................................... 9-39-3

A Installation trouble shooting

Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... A-1A-1

Power failure ............................................................................................................................................................................. A-2A-2

Installing the NE software................................................................................................................................................... A-3A-3

Parameters for NE software installation........................................................................................................................ A-5A-5

Fiber cleaning............................................................................................................................................................................ A-7A-7

Removing the SFP modules................................................................................................................................................ A-9A-9

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

vii

Page 8: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

B Cable specifications

Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... B-1B-1

Belden: YE00335..................................................................................................................................................................... B-2B-2

Belden: 46585/Lucent: 407128115................................................................................................................................... B-3B-3

Belden: 46040/Lucent: 848004503................................................................................................................................... B-4B-4

Belden: 46160........................................................................................................................................................................... B-5B-5

Belden: 46161/Lucent: 408386522................................................................................................................................... B-6B-6

Belden: 46169/Lucent: 407529478................................................................................................................................... B-7B-7

Belden: 46114/Lucent: 848068607................................................................................................................................... B-8B-8

Nexans: ET2PB556/Lucent: 408386498........................................................................................................................ B-9B-9

Nexans (Filotex®): ET2PA324........................................................................................................................................ B-10B-10

Nexans (Filotex®): ET2PF947........................................................................................................................................ B-11B-11

Nexans: 2PA329/Lucent: 848068607............................................................................................................................ B-12B-12

Nexans: NCX1........................................................................................................................................................................ B-13B-13

Nexans: 296452...................................................................................................................................................................... B-14B-14

C Cable assembly instructions

Overview ..................................................................................................................................................................................... C-1C-1

SUB-D connector..................................................................................................................................................................... C-2C-2

Coax connector (1.6/5.6)...................................................................................................................................................... C-5C-5

Mounting 4 × 2.5 mm coax (75Ω) to RJ45 connector.......................................................................................... C-8C-8

Glossary

Index

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

viii Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 9: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

List of tables

2-1 Maximum number of systems within one rack........................................................................................... 2-22-2

2-2 Technical specifications (AC/DC converter)................................................................................................. 2-32-3

2-3 Available tributary and option cards.............................................................................................................. 2-112-11

2-4 Fan unit configuration according to ETSI Class 3.1............................................................................... 2-142-14

2-5 Fan unit configuration according to ETSI Class 3.1E............................................................................ 2-152-15

4-1 Pin assignment (power cables)........................................................................................................................... 4-64-6

4-2 Components (power cables)................................................................................................................................. 4-64-6

4-3 Components (grounding cable)........................................................................................................................ 4-104-10

4-4 Components (grounding cable)......................................................................................................................... 4-114-11

4-5 Pin assignment (MDI/O with floating MDI inputs)................................................................................ 4-164-16

4-6 Components (MDI/O with floating MDI inputs)...................................................................................... 4-174-17

4-7 Pin assignment (Easy MDI cable).................................................................................................................. 4-184-18

4-8 Components (Easy MDI cable)........................................................................................................................ 4-204-20

4-9 Pin assignment (station clock cable, 100/120Ω) ..................................................................................... 4-224-22

4-10 Components (station clock cable, 100/120Ω) .......................................................................................... 4-224-22

4-11 Pin assignment (station clock cable, 75Ω) ................................................................................................ 4-234-23

4-12 Components (station clock cable, 75Ω) ...................................................................................................... 4-244-24

4-13 Pin assignment (Q-LAN/G-LAN cable)....................................................................................................... 4-264-26

4-14 Components (Q-LAN/G-LAN cable)............................................................................................................. 4-264-26

4-15 Pin assignment (ITM-CIT cable)..................................................................................................................... 4-294-29

4-16 Components (ITM-CIT cable).......................................................................................................................... 4-294-29

4-17 Pin assignment (V.11 cable).............................................................................................................................. 4-314-31

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

ix

Page 10: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

4-18 Components (V.11 cable).................................................................................................................................... 4-324-32

4-19 Pin assignment (E1 cable, 120Ω symmetrical)........................................................................................ 4-364-36

4-20 Components (E1 cable, 120Ω symmetrical) ............................................................................................. 4-364-36

4-21 Pin assignment (E1 cable, 75Ω coaxial) .................................................................................................... 4-374-37

4-22 Components (E1 cable, 75Ω coaxial) .......................................................................................................... 4-384-38

4-23 Components (E3 cable)....................................................................................................................................... 4-404-40

4-24 Pin assignment (DS1 cable).............................................................................................................................. 4-424-42

4-25 Components (DS1 cable).................................................................................................................................... 4-424-42

4-26 Components (DS3 cable).................................................................................................................................... 4-444-44

4-27 Pin assignment (LAN cable - E/FE).............................................................................................................. 4-464-46

4-28 Components (LAN cable - E/FE/GE)........................................................................................................... 4-464-46

4-29 Pin assignment (LAN cable - GE)................................................................................................................. 4-474-47

4-30 Components (STM-1e cable)............................................................................................................................ 4-574-57

4-31 SFP characteristics................................................................................................................................................. 4-604-60

4-32 Components (Fiber cables)................................................................................................................................ 4-614-61

7-1 Mean launched power ranges.............................................................................................................................. 7-87-8

7-2 Receiver sensitivity ranges................................................................................................................................... 7-97-9

8-1 Optical input power ranges.................................................................................................................................. 8-38-3

B-1 Specifications (Belden: YE00335 cable)....................................................................................................... B-2B-2

B-2 Specifications (Belden: 46585/Lucent: 407128115 cables).................................................................... B-3B-3

B-3 Specifications (Belden: 46040/Lucent: 848004503 cables)................................................................... B-4B-4

B-4 Specifications (Belden: 46160 cable).............................................................................................................. B-6B-6

B-5 Specifications (Belden: 46161/Lucent: 408386522 cables)................................................................... B-7B-7

B-6 Specifications (Belden: 46169/Lucent: 407529478 cables)................................................................... B-8B-8

B-7 Specifications (Belden: 46114/Lucent: 848068607 cables).................................................................... B-9B-9

B-8 Specifications (Nexans: ET2PB556/Lucent: 408386498 cables)...................................................... B-10B-10

B-9 Specifications (Nexans (Filotex®): ET2PA324 cable).......................................................................... B-11B-11

B-10 Specifications (Nexans (Filotex®): ET2PF947 cable)........................................................................... B-12B-12

B-11 Specifications (Nexans: 2PA329/Lucent: 848068607 cables)............................................................. B-13B-13

List of tables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

x Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 11: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

B-12 Specifications (Nexans: NCX1 cable).......................................................................................................... B-14B-14

B-13 Specifications (Nexans: 296452 cable)........................................................................................................ B-15B-15

List of tables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

xi

Page 12: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview
Page 13: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

List of figures

2-1 AC/DC converter...................................................................................................................................................... 2-32-3

2-2 Optical SFP module.............................................................................................................................................. 2-102-10

2-3 SFP155E module.................................................................................................................................................... 2-102-10

2-4 Fan unit ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-162-16

3-1 1655 AMU 2m/4o unit........................................................................................................................................... 3-43-4

3-2 Rear view of 1655 AMU 2m/4o unit with fans.......................................................................................... 3-53-5

3-3 Bracket mounting..................................................................................................................................................... 3-73-7

3-4 AMU 2m/4o subrack mounting.......................................................................................................................... 3-83-8

3-5 MAIN card MI-16/4 ............................................................................................................................................. 3-103-10

3-6 MAIN card MI-14/4 ............................................................................................................................................. 3-113-11

3-7 TRIB cards PI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75........................................................................................................ 3-113-11

3-8 TRIB card EPL4_E14.......................................................................................................................................... 3-123-12

3-9 TRIB cards EPL4_E132_75.............................................................................................................................. 3-123-12

3-10 TRIB card ESW4_E14........................................................................................................................................ 3-133-13

3-11 TRIB card SI-14/8................................................................................................................................................. 3-133-13

3-12 Adapter card AC-1................................................................................................................................................ 3-143-14

3-13 E3DS3/3_E14 card................................................................................................................................................ 3-153-15

3-14 EOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 cards....................................................................................................... 3-163-16

3-15 Slot positions........................................................................................................................................................... 3-173-17

3-16 2m/4o subrack with mounted cards................................................................................................................ 3-193-19

3-17 Card retraction with the help of a screw driver........................................................................................ 3-203-20

3-18 Mounting of an AM/AMS option card......................................................................................................... 3-223-22

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

xiii

Page 14: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

3-19 Fan unit mounting to a 2m/4o subrack......................................................................................................... 3-243-24

3-20 1655 AMU 1m/1o unit ........................................................................................................................................ 3-273-27

3-21 Rear view of 1655 AMU 1m/1o unit with fan.......................................................................................... 3-283-28

3-22 Bracket mounting................................................................................................................................................... 3-313-31

3-23 AMU 1m/1o subrack mounting....................................................................................................................... 3-323-32

3-24 Bracket mounting................................................................................................................................................... 3-333-33

3-25 2H Subrack............................................................................................................................................................... 3-353-35

3-26 MAIN card MI-16/4 ............................................................................................................................................. 3-363-36

3-27 MAIN card MI-14/4 ............................................................................................................................................. 3-373-37

3-28 TRIB cards PI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75........................................................................................................ 3-373-37

3-29 TRIB card EPL4_E14.......................................................................................................................................... 3-383-38

3-30 TRIB cards EPL4_E132_75.............................................................................................................................. 3-383-38

3-31 TRIB card ESW4_E14........................................................................................................................................ 3-393-39

3-32 TRIB card SI-14/8................................................................................................................................................. 3-393-39

3-33 E3DS3/3_E14 card................................................................................................................................................ 3-403-40

3-34 Slot positions........................................................................................................................................................... 3-413-41

3-35 Card insertion.......................................................................................................................................................... 3-423-42

3-36 1m/1o subrack with mounted cards................................................................................................................ 3-433-43

3-37 Card retraction with the help of a screw driver........................................................................................ 3-443-44

3-38 Fan unit mounting to a 1m/1o vertical subrack........................................................................................ 3-463-46

3-39 Fan unit mounting to a 1m/1o horizontal subrack................................................................................... 3-473-47

4-1 Cable routing.............................................................................................................................................................. 4-24-2

4-2 Preferred cable boundary lines........................................................................................................................... 4-34-3

4-3 Redundant DC power connection...................................................................................................................... 4-84-8

4-4 AC/DC converter connected to one main card............................................................................................ 4-94-9

4-5 AC/DC converter connected to two main cards.......................................................................................... 4-94-9

4-6 DIN rail ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-104-10

4-7 Grounding cable..................................................................................................................................................... 4-104-10

4-8 Subrack grounding................................................................................................................................................. 4-114-11

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xiv Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 15: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

4-9 Floating MDI circuit ............................................................................................................................................. 4-144-14

4-10 Easy MDI and Floating MDI implementation........................................................................................... 4-144-14

4-11 MDO circuit ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-154-15

4-12 Cable design (MDI/O with floating MDI inputs)..................................................................................... 4-164-16

4-13 Cable design (Easy MDI cable)....................................................................................................................... 4-184-18

4-14 MDI/MDO cable connection............................................................................................................................. 4-214-21

4-15 Cable design (station clock cable, 100/120Ω) ......................................................................................... 4-224-22

4-16 Cable design (station clock cable, 75Ω) ..................................................................................................... 4-234-23

4-17 Station clock cable connection......................................................................................................................... 4-254-25

4-18 Cable design (Q-LAN/G-LAN cable)........................................................................................................... 4-264-26

4-19 Q-LAN cable connection.................................................................................................................................... 4-274-27

4-20 G-LAN cable connection.................................................................................................................................... 4-284-28

4-21 Cable design (ITM-CIT cable)......................................................................................................................... 4-294-29

4-22 ITM-CIT cable connection................................................................................................................................. 4-304-30

4-23 Cable design (V.11 cable)................................................................................................................................... 4-314-31

4-24 V.11 cable connection.......................................................................................................................................... 4-334-33

4-25 USB cable connection.......................................................................................................................................... 4-344-34

4-26 Cable design (E1 cable, 120Ω symmetrical) ............................................................................................ 4-354-35

4-27 Cable design (E1 cable, 75Ω coaxial) ......................................................................................................... 4-374-37

4-28 E1 cable connection.............................................................................................................................................. 4-394-39

4-29 Cable design (E3 cable)...................................................................................................................................... 4-404-40

4-30 E3 cable connection.............................................................................................................................................. 4-414-41

4-31 Cable design (DS1 cable)................................................................................................................................... 4-424-42

4-32 DS1 cable connection........................................................................................................................................... 4-434-43

4-33 Cable design (DS3 cable)................................................................................................................................... 4-444-44

4-34 DS3 cable connection........................................................................................................................................... 4-454-45

4-35 Cable design (LAN cable - E/FE).................................................................................................................. 4-464-46

4-36 Cable design (LAN cable - GE)...................................................................................................................... 4-474-47

4-37 LAN cable connection......................................................................................................................................... 4-484-48

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

xv

Page 16: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

4-38 EPL4_E14 cable connection.............................................................................................................................. 4-504-50

4-39 EPL4_E132_75 cable connection.................................................................................................................... 4-524-52

4-40 Cable design (STM-1e cable)........................................................................................................................... 4-574-57

4-41 Optical SFP module.............................................................................................................................................. 4-584-58

4-42 Optical connector types....................................................................................................................................... 4-614-61

4-43 Fiber cable connection......................................................................................................................................... 4-624-62

6-1 Cable connection for fast NE software download...................................................................................... 6-76-7

6-2 ITM-CIT cable connection................................................................................................................................. 6-106-10

7-1 STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 port connection to optical distribution frame test..................................... 7-67-6

7-2 Main card equipment protection test............................................................................................................. 7-107-10

7-3 PDH/DSx option card test.................................................................................................................................. 7-137-13

7-4 EPL option card test............................................................................................................................................. 7-177-17

7-5 Switched Ethernet option card test................................................................................................................. 7-207-20

8-1 Optical received power test.................................................................................................................................. 8-28-2

8-2 Connection verification test................................................................................................................................. 8-48-4

8-3 Transmission stability test..................................................................................................................................... 8-68-6

A-1 Unlocking an MSA latch (type 1) SFP........................................................................................................ A-10A-10

A-2 Unlocking an MSA latch (type 2) SFP........................................................................................................ A-11A-11

A-3 Unlocking a bail latch (type 1) SFP............................................................................................................. A-12A-12

A-4 Unlocking a bail latch (type 2) SFP............................................................................................................. A-13A-13

B-1 Belden: YE00335 cable......................................................................................................................................... B-2B-2

B-2 Belden: 46585/Lucent: 407128115 cables..................................................................................................... B-3B-3

B-3 Belden: 46040/Lucent: 848004503 cables.................................................................................................... B-4B-4

B-4 Belden: 46160 cable............................................................................................................................................... B-5B-5

B-5 Belden: 46161/Lucent: 408386522 cables.................................................................................................... B-6B-6

B-6 Belden: 46169/Lucent: 407529478 cables.................................................................................................... B-7B-7

B-7 Belden: 46114 / Lucent: 848068607 cables................................................................................................. B-8B-8

B-8 Nexans: ET2PB556/Lucent: 408386498 cables.......................................................................................... B-9B-9

B-9 Nexans (Filotex®): ET2PA324 cable........................................................................................................... B-10B-10

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xvi Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 17: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

B-10 Nexans (Filotex®): ET2PF947 cable............................................................................................................ B-11B-11

B-11 Nexans: 2PA329/Lucent: 848068607 cables.............................................................................................. B-12B-12

B-12 Nexans: NCX1 cable........................................................................................................................................... B-13B-13

B-13 Nexans: 296452 cable......................................................................................................................................... B-14B-14

C-1 SUB-D assembly steps.......................................................................................................................................... C-3C-3

C-2 Low frequency cable.............................................................................................................................................. C-4C-4

C-3 IMS assembly procedure...................................................................................................................................... C-6C-6

C-4 Crimp tool and die.................................................................................................................................................. C-7C-7

C-5 RJ45 connector....................................................................................................................................................... C-11C-11

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

xvii

Page 18: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview
Page 19: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

About this documentAbout this document

Purpose

This manualprovides information on the installation and configuration of 1655 AccessMultiplexer UniversalAMU units. Furthermore, all steps for putting the system intooperation are also described.

Reason for revision

This is the first issue of this guide for 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMURelease6.0.

Note

The 1655Access Multiplexer Universal AMU Installation Guide contains images withold logos andwill be updated in forthcoming releases.

The following table lists previous release versions and their corresponding features.

Release GA Features

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

xix

Page 20: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

1.0 August 2004 The following features have beenprovided in this release.

• One shelf variant with two main andfour option card slots and one shelfvariant with one main and one optioncard slot

• One main unit with pluggable lineinterfaces for two STM-1 or twoSTM-4; supports two extra STM-1interfaces

• Double width adapter card support forlegacy option cards; LAN boardoptimized for Ethernet Private Line(X8PL - Option card Ethernet PrivateLine 8 × E/FE interfaces) cards withLCAS

• 63 × E1 with RJ45 connectors (120Ω/75 Ω)

• 1 + 1 MSP protection on STM-1/4interfaces

• DCC for network elementmanagement

• Supports cross-connection betweentributary and aggregate interfaces;non-blocking LO connectivity

• MSP Performance Monitoring only

• Local and remote softwaredownloading

• Supports centralized alarmmanagement using Wavestar®ITM-CIT

• Supports remote alarm investigationthrough Miscellaneous Discrete Inputs(MDI) and Miscellaneous DiscreteOutputs (MDO)

• Cross-connect loopbacks for electricalinterfaces

• 2 Mbit/s external synchronizationclock

• Space efficient design for rackmounting

• Supported by the Wavestar®ITM-CIT - Release 13.02 andWavestar® ITM-SC Release 11.3

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xx Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 21: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

2.0 February 2005 The following features have beenprovided in this release.

• Additional pluggable STM1e

• Additional legacy card support:– 4 × 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

(X4IP)– 16 × DS1– 2 × E3– 2 × DS3

• Main board protection,VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 SNC/N protection

• Performance Monitoring forVC-12/VC-3/VC-4, PDH 2Mbit/sframes, and AIS detection

• VPN tagging and provisionableEthertype

• Double tagging on LAN ports

• Customer WAN port operation mode

• Increased IEEE VLAN instances

• Ethernet Private Line option cardwith 2 × E/FE (TX), 2 × E/FE/GE(TX/optical SFP), 4 × E1 (75/120Ω)

• Pluggable GE for SX, LX, and ZX

• Ethernet Private Line option cardwith 4 × E/FE (TX), 32 × E1 (75Ω)

• External AC/DC power converter

• Supported by Wavestar® ITM-CIT -Release 14.0, Wavestar® ITM-SC,Release 11.4, Lucent NetworkManagement System (NMS), Release8.2, Lucent Optical ManagementSystem (OMS), Release 3.2.

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

xxi

Page 22: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

2.1 Sep 2005 The following features have beenprovided in this release.

• Bidirectional performance monitoringfor midway points and connectiontermination points

• AU-4 Non-intrusive bidirectionalmonitoring

• TU-12, TU-3, Near-end non-intrusivemonitoring

NOTES:

• These features can be managed by theITM-SC only. For the ITM-SC users,these features are applicable only to1655 Access Multiplexer UniversalAMU Release 2.1 and areinapplicable for subsequent releases.

• For the ITM-CIT users, the 1655Access Multiplexer Universal AMURelease 2.1 provides network elementsoftware via the Fast Download Tool(FDT). For more information, refer tothe Installation Guide.

3.0 Jan 2006 The following features have beenprovided in this release.

• Switched Ethernet option card with 2× E/FE, 2 × E/FE/GE, and 4 E1interfaces (75/120Ω)

• Option card for 8 × STM-1 or 2 ×STM-4

• Link Pass Through (LPT) onEPL4_E14 - Release 2.0,EPL4_E132_75 - Release 2.0,ESW4_E14 - Release 3.0 option cards

• Supported by the Lucent OMSRelease 4.2 and Wavestar® ITM-CIT- Release 16.0

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxii Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 23: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

4.0 August 2006 The following features have beenprovided in this release:

• Main unit - 2 x STM-1/4 and 2 ×STM-4/16 interfaces using SFPs

• STM-16 SFP

• Performance Monitoring featuresThe following performancemonitoring features have beenimplemented in this release.– General Purpose Ethernet Monitor– Ethernet Service Monitor– Ethernet Congestion Monitor– Ethernet High Priority Traffic

Monitor– Ethernet Low Priority Traffic

Monitor– Ethernet Frame Delay Monitor.

• Advanced TransLAN® features forthe ESW4_E14 option card.

• Supported by the Lucent OMSRelease 5.0 and Wavestar® ITM-CIT- Release 17.0

4.1 February 2007 The following features have beenprovided in this release:

• VC-4-4c cross connection

• Outloops on Ethernet ports

• Alarm severity assignment profiles(ASAP) support

• Performance Monitoring features

• Supports features from® AMURelease 2.1

• Supported by the Lucent OMSRelease 5.0.2 and Wavestar®

ITM-CIT- Release 18.0

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

xxiii

Page 24: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

5.0 March 2008 The following features have beenprovided in this release:

• 3 × E3/DS3 plus 4 × E1 card[ASC111]

• Main unit with 1 × pluggableSTM-4/16 line dual rate interfaces[ASC114]

• Support for Cascaded SNC/Nprotection : LO/LO, HO/HO

• Support for inband E1 managementchannel

• MIB upload/download (Web GUI)

The following features have beenprovided in this release:

Two new street cabinet shelves

• 2H Shelf– 1 main and 1 option slot

Horizontal [ASH112]– Integrated fan [ASF102]

• 6H Shelf– 2 main and 4 option slots

Horizontal [ASH111]– Integrated fan [ASF101]

Street cabinet shelves with the followingfeatures:

• Extended temperature operation

• up to 50% size reduction in COapplication

• Horizontal mounting

• Fully managed fan solution

• Right or left airflow directionselectable at installation

• Integrated mounting brackets

TransLAN™ features:

• GUI adapt. for 802.1ag OAM (CC,LB)

• Layer 2 MAC Access Control List

• CFI p-bit swapping on NR ports

• TPID swapping on NR ports

• IEEE 802.3ah OAM (EFM)

• Link Aggregation Groups with LACP

• p0-bit override on Egress CustomerPorts

OMS/CIT features

• ITM-CIT support for Windows VistaOperating system

• OMS R6.3.2 support

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxiv Nokia – ProprietarySee notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 25: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6.0 March 2009 The following features have been provided in

this release:

Support for Ethernet over PDH (EoPDH) option cards:

Quad E/FE/GbE switched Ethernet card with

Ethernet over PDH support and 32 × E1 interfaces

120 (ASC112)

Quad E/FE/GbE switched Ethernet card with

Ethernet over PDH support and 32 × E1 interfaces

75 (ASC113)

inter-working with TSS-3

64 E1 signal termination capacity

16 VCGs, E1-xv, x =1..16

32 E1 interfaces on unit

Digital Diagnostics Monitoring (DDM) on

SFPs

PDH performance monitoring on E1 in accordance

to G.704

TransLAN™ features:

GFP-FCS support for P12s-Xv in GFP-F

mapping

Support for 16k MAC addresses

Manual STP timer provisioning

Retrieval of additional STP information

Flexible traffic class to queue assignment

OMS/CIT features:

1350 OMS R9.1.1 support

February 2017 Following are the updates made to the document:

1655AMU main card - MI-16/4, with the comcode 109819227,

has been added at the following locations:

1. Table 2-4 Fan unit configuration according to ETSI

Class 3.1

2. Cable data (Easy MDI)

Safety information

For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given

at points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist.

Failure to follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious

consequences.

Intended audience

This manual is intended for users who wish to install, configure and cable 1655 AMU

subracks including all accessories.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

xxv

Page 26: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

This requires that the installation staff has a basic knowledge of SDH and Ethernettechnology. Working on the equipment described in this manual requires also specialtraining of the personnel.

How to use this information product

This manual is divided into the following sections with a brief description of thecontents of each major part/chapter/appendix:

About this document describes the purpose, intended audience, reason for reissue,and organisation of this document. This section references related documentation andexplains how to order, make comments or recommend changes to this document.

Part I – Physical and power installation

• Chapter 1, SafetyThis chapter provides all relevant information and safety guidelines to safeguardagainst personal injury. Furthermore, this chapter may be useful to prevent materialdamage to the equipment.

• Chapter 2, General informationThis chapter provides all facts which must be known before the system can beinstalled, such as environmental requirements, ITM-CIT requirements, EMC/ESDinformation, etc.

• Chapter 3, Mechanical installationThis chapter provides all information needed to install 1655 AMU subracks andcards.

• Chapter 4, System cablingThis chapter provides all tasks for a complete system cabling.

• Chapter 5, PoweringThis chapter describes the system powering and some final tests which should beperformed to end the physical installation part.

Part II – NE provisioning and stand alone installation test

• Chapter 6, ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioningThis chapter describes the ITM-CIT and NE software installation and the initial NEprovisioning via ITM-CIT.

• Chapter 7, Stand alone test proceduresThis chapter provides all tests which must be performed to verify the properworking of the cards/NEs.

Part III – Link testing

• Chapter 8, Link testingThis chapter provides link acceptance tests which are necessary to verify thefunctionality of the overall system.

• Chapter 9, ConclusionThis chapter provides a final checklist and a signoff sheet to be sure that allrequired tasks described in this manual have been done.

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxvi Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 27: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Appendices

• Appendix A, Installation TroubleshootingThis chapter provides basic installation troubleshooting information.

• Appendix B, Cable specificationsThis chapter provides detailed cable specifications.

• Appendix C, Cable assembly instructionsThis chapter provides general cable assembly instructions.

Glossary provides definitions for telecommunication acronyms and terms.

Index supplies users with specific subjects and corresponding page numbers to findnecessary information.

Conventions used

The following conventions are used throughout the manual:

Numbering

The chapters of this document are numbered consecutively. The page numberingrestarts at “1” in each chapter. To facilitate identifying pages in different chapters, thepage numbers are prefixed with the chapter number. For example, page 2-3 is the thirdpage in chapter 2.

Cross-references

Cross-reference conventions are identical with those used for numbering, i.e. the firstnumber in a reference to a particular page refers to the corresponding chapter.

Keyword-blocks

This document contains so-called keyword blocks to facilitate the location of specifictext passages. The keyword blocks are placed to the left of the main text and indicatethe contents of a paragraph or group of paragraphs.

Abbreviations

Abbreviations used in this document can be found in the “Glossary” unless it can beassumed that the reader is familiar with the abbreviation.

Codes

The codes (CC, DC and SC) in this manual are used to define a hardware item owned by the Nokia Development Systems. The code consists of a letter combination followed by a combination of numbers (Example: CC123456789).

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

xxvii

Page 28: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Related documentation

This section briefly describes the documents that are included in the1655 AMUdocumentation set.

• Installation GuideThe 1655 AMU Installation Guide is a step-by-step guide to system installation andsetup. It also includes information needed for pre-installation site planning andpost-installation acceptance testing.

• Applications and Planning GuideThe 1655 AMU Applications and Planning Guide is for use by network planners,analysts and managers. It is also for use by the Nokia Account Team. It presentsa detailed overview of the system, describes its applications, gives planningrequirements, engineering rules, ordering information, and technicalspecifications.

• User Operations GuideThe 1655 AMU User Operations Guide provides step-by-step information for use indaily system operations. The manual demonstrates how to perform systemprovisioning, operations, and administrative tasks by use of ITM-CIT.

• Alarm Messages and Trouble Clearing GuideThe 1655 AMU Alarm Messages and Trouble Clearing Guide gives detailedinformationon each possible alarm message. Furthermore, it provides proceduresfor routine maintenance, troubleshooting, diagnostics, and component replacement.

The following table lists the documents included in the 1655 AMU documentation set.

Document title Document code

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU Applications andPlanning Guide

109686907

(365-312-847R6.0)

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU User OperationsGuide

109686949

(365-312-850R6.0)

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU Alarm Messagesand Trouble Clearing Guide

109686915

(365-312-849R6.0)

1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU Installation Guide 109686931

(365-312-848R6.0)

CD-ROM Documentation 1655 Access Multiplexer UniversalAMU (all manuals on a CD-ROM)

109686923

(365-312-853R6.0)

Engineering and Ordering Information ED8C939-10

Interconnect information ED8C939-20

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxviii Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 29: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Technical support

Nokia provides the following Technical Support Services:

• Remote Technical Support (RTS) – remote technical support to troubleshoot andresolve system problems.

• On-site Technical Support (OTS) – on-site assistance with operational issues andremedial maintenance.

• Repair and Replacement (R&R) – technical support services for device repair/returnor parts replacement.

• Nokia Online Customer Support – online access to information and servicesthat can help resolve technical support requests.

NOTE: Technical Support Services are available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

When additional technical assistance is needed, use the appropriate contact informationin the table below.

Customer location Initial Nokia contact location

Inside the United Statesand Canada

Technical Support Services can be reached at

1-866-LUCENT8 (866-582-3688):Prompt#1.

Outside the United States Technical Support Services can be reached at

+1-630-224-4672: Prompt#2.

Web Site For additional information regarding Worldwide Services, refer to the Nokia’ web site at

https://networks.nokia.com/support

How to order

For all questions concerning ordering of 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal AMU documentation, for a complete list of the marketable items and their comcodes, and for ordering the equipment, please contact your Account Executive or your Nokia local customer team.

How to comment

To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://www. lucent-info.com/comments/enus/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline ([email protected]).

Because customer satisfaction is extremely important to Nokia, every attempt is made to encourage feedback from customers about our information products. Thank you for your feedback.

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

xxix

Page 30: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview
Page 31: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Part I: Physical and powerinstallation

Overview

Purpose

This part of the 1655 AMU Installation Guide contains the physical installation of the1655 AMU units including the system cabling and the system powering.

Contents

This part of the document contains the following chapters:

• Chapter 1Safety

• Chapter 2Generalinformation

• Chapter 3Mechanical installation

• Chapter 4System cabling

• Chapter 5Powering.

Entry checklist

The following table provides a checklist to be completed before performing thephysicalandpower installation. Verify that each procedure has been completed. Checkoff and initial the item.

Procedure Completed Initials Notes

Are the needed 1655 AMU subracks available?

Are all needed cards available?

Are all needed SFPs available?

Are all needed cables available?

Is a fan unit available (if necessary)?

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

I-1

Page 32: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Procedure Completed Initials Notes

Are there any obstacles that will affect thephysical installation or cabling?

Are the required fuse/breaker positionsavailable?

Is an AC/DC converter available (if required)?

Is an ESD wrist strap available?

Are the following metric tools available?

• 2 mm screwdriver(needed for power connector)

• 3 mm hexagonal wrench(needed for subrack mounting)

Is a 1.0/2.3 coax crimp tool available?

(needed for STM-1e connections via SFP155Emodules)

Is a soldering iron available?

Is a multimeter available?

Is an ohmmeter available?

Contents

Chapter 1, Safety 1-1

Chapter 2, General information 2-1

Chapter 3, Mechanical installation 3-1

Chapter 4, System cabling 4-1

Chapter 5, Powering 5-1

Physical and power installation Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

I-2 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 33: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

1 1Safety

Overview

Purpose

The aim of this chapter on safety is to provide users of 1655 AMU systems with therelevantinformationandsafety guidelines to safeguard against personal injury.Furthermore, this chapter may be useful to prevent material damage to the equipment.

The present chapter on safetymustbe read by the responsible technical personnelbefore carrying out relevant work on the system. The valid version of this documentmust always be kept close to the equipment.

Potential sources of danger

The 1655 AMU systems have been developed in line with the present state-of-the-artand fulfils the current national and international safety requirements. They are providedwith a high degree of operational safety resulting from many years of developmentexperience and continuous stringent quality checks in our company.

The equipment is safe in normal operation. There are, however, some potential sourcesof danger that cannot be completely eliminated. In particular, these arise during the:

• opening of housings or equipment covers,

• manipulation of any kind within the equipment, even if it has been disconnectedfrom the power supply,

• disconnection of optical or electrical connections,

• installation or removal of SFPs,

through possible contact with the following:

• live parts,

• laser light,

• hot surfaces, or

• sharp edges.

Contents

General notes on safety 1-3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

1-1

Page 34: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Structure of safety statements 1-3

Basic safety aspects 1-6

Specific safety areas 1-8

Laser safety 1-8

Power supply safety instructions 1-11

Electrostatic discharge 1-11

Conformity statements 1-13

Safety Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-2 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 35: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

General notes on safety

Overview

Purpose

This section provides general information on the structure of safety instructions andsummarizesgeneralsafetyrequirements.

Contents

Structure of safety statements 1-3

Basic safety aspects 1-6

Structure of safety statements

Overview

Safety statements describe the safety risks relevant while performing tasks on Nokia products during deployment and/or use. Failure to avoid the hazards may have serious consequences.

General structure

Safety statements include the following structural elements:

Item Structure element Purpose

1 Safety alert symbol Indicates the potential for personal injury(optional)

2 Safety symbol Indicates hazard type (optional)

3 Signal word Indicates the severity of the hazard

Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injury

due to the size and weight of the equipment.

Always use three people or a lifting device to transport

and position this equipment. [ABC123]

CAUTION

Lifting hazard

B C D

E F

G

H

Safety General notes on safetyOverview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

1-3

Page 36: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Item Structure element Purpose

4 Hazard type Describes the source of the risk of damageor injury

5 Safety message Consequences if protective measures fail

6 Avoidance message Protective measures to take to avoid thehazard

7 Identifier The reference ID of the safety statement(optional)

Signal words

The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:

Signal word Meaning

DANGER Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided,will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, couldresult in death or serious injury.

CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, couldresult in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.

Warning symbols

These warning symbols are defined for safety instructions:

Safety General notes on safetyStructure of safety statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-4 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 37: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Legend:

1 General warning of danger

2 Electric shock

3 Hazard of laser radiation

4 Components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD)

5 Electromagnetic radiation

6 Flammable material/Risk of fire

7 Service disruption hazard

8 Laceration hazard

9 Corrosive substance

10 Hazard caused by batteries

11 Hot surface

12 Heavy overload load

13 Noxious substance

14 Explosion hazard

Safety General notes on safetyStructure of safety statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

1-5

Page 38: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

15 Falling object hazard

16 Risk of suffocation

17 Pinch hazard

18 Lifting hazard, heavy object

19 Inhalation hazard

20 Slip hazard

21 Trip hazard

22 Hazard of falling

Basic safety aspects

General safety requirements

In order to keep the technically unavoidable residual risk to a minimum, it isimperative to observe the following rules:

• Transport, storage and operation of the system must be under thepermissibleconditions only.See accompanying documentation and information on the system.

• Installation, configuration and disassembly must be carried out only byexpertpersonnelandwith reference to the respective documentation.Due to the complexity of the system, the personnel requiresspecial training.

• The system must be operated byexpert and authorised users only.The user must operate the system only after havingread and understoodthischapter on safety and the parts of the documentation relevant to operation. Forcomplex systems, additional training is recommended. Any obligatory training foroperating and service personnel must be carried out and documented.

• The system must not be operated unless it is in perfect working order.Any faults and errors that might affect safety must be reportedimmediatelyby theuser to a person in responsibility.

• The system must be operated only with the connections and under theenvironmental conditions as described in the documentation.

• Any conversions or changes to the system or parts of the system (including thesoftware) must be carried out by qualified Nokia personnel or by expertpersonnel authorised by Nokia.All changes carried out by other persons lead to a complete exemption fromliability .No components/spare parts must be used other than those recommended by themanufacturer and those listed in the procurement documents.

Safety General notes on safetyStructure of safety statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-6 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 39: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

• The removal or disabling of safety facilities, the clearing of faults and errors, andthe maintenance of the equipment must be carried out byspecially qualifiedpersonnel only.The respective parts of the documentation must be strictly observed. Thedocumentation must also be consulted during the selection of measuring and testequipment.

• Calibrations, special tests after repairs and regular safety checks must be carriedout, documented and archived.

• Non-system software is used at one’sown risk. The use/installation of non-systemsoftware can adversely affect the normal functioning of the system.

• Only usetested and virus-freedata carriers (floppy disks, streamer tapes,) .

Safety General notes on safetyBasic safety aspects

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

1-7

Page 40: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Specific safety areas

Overview

Purpose

The aspects of “laser safety” and “handling of components sensitive to electrostaticdischarge (ESD)” are of vital importance for the 1655 AMU equipment. Therefore, thekey safety instructions for these subjects are summarised in the following.

Contents

Laser safety 1-8

Power supply safety instructions 1-11

Electrostatic discharge 1-11

Conformity statements 1-13

Laser safety

Overview

Optical fiber telecommunication systems, their associated test sets, and similaroperating systems use semiconductor laser transmitters that emit infrared (IR) light atwavelengths between approximately 800 nanometers and 1600 nanometers. The emittedlight is above the red end of the visible spectrum, which is normally not visible to thehuman eye. Although radiant energy at near-IR wavelengths is officially designatedinvisible, some people can see the shorter wavelength energy even at power levelsseveral orders of magnitude below any that have been shown to cause injury to theeye.

Conventional lasers can produce an intense beam of monochromatic light. The termmonochromaticity means a single wavelength output of pure color that may be visibleor invisible to the eye. A conventional laser produces a small-size beam of light, andbecause the beam size is small the power density (also called irradiance) is very high.Consequently, lasers and laser products are subject to federal and applicable stateregulations as well as international standards for their safe operation.

A conventional laser beam expands very little over distance, or is said to be very wellcollimated. Thus, conventional laser irradiance remains relatively constant overdistance. However, lasers used in lightwave systems have a large beam divergence,typically 10 to 20 degrees. Here, irradiance obeys the inverse square law (doubling thedistance reduces the irradiance by a factor of 4) and rapidly decreases over distance.

Safety Specific safety areasOverview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-8 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 41: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Lasers and eye damage

The optical energy emitted by laser and high-radiance LEDs in the 400-1400 nm rangemay cause eye damage if absorbed by the retina. When a beam of light enters the eye,the eye magnifies and focuses the energy on the retina magnifying the irradiance. Theirradiance of the energy that reaches the retina is approximately 105 or 100,000 timesmore than at the cornea and, if sufficiently intense, may cause a retinal burn.

The damage mechanism at the wavelengths used in an optical fiber telecommunicationsis thermal in origin i.e., damage caused by heating. Therefore, a specific amount ofenergy is required for a definite time to heat an area of retinal tissue. Damage to theretina occurs only when one looks at the light sufficiently long that the product of theretinal irradiance and the viewing time exceeds the damage threshold. Optical energiesabove 1400 nm cause corneal and skin burns but do not affect the retina. Thethresholds for injury at wavelengths greater than 1400 nm are significantly higher thanfor wavelengths in the retinal hazard region.

Classification of lasers

Manufacturers of lasers and laser products in the U.S. are regulated by the Food andDrug Administration’s Center for Devices and Radiological Health (FDA/CDRH) under21 CFR 1040. These regulations require manufacturers to certify each laser or laserproduct as belonging to one of four major Classes I, II, lla, IlIa, lllb, or IV. TheInternational Electro-technical Commission is an international standards body thatwrites laser safety standards under IEC-60825. Classification schemes are similar withClasses divided into Classes 1, 1M, 2, 2M, 3B, 3R and 4. Lasers are classifiedaccording to the accessible emission limits and their potential for causing injury.Optical fiber telecommunication systems are generally classified as Class I/1, because,under normal operating conditions, all energized laser transmitting circuit packs areterminated on optical fibers which enclose the laser energy with the fiber sheathforming a protective housing. Also, a protective housing / access panel is typicallyinstalled in front of the laser circuit pack shelves. The circuit packs themselves,however, may be FDA/CDRH Class I or IIIb or IEC Class 1, 1M, 3B, 3R or 4. Stateof the art Raman and EDFA optical amplifiers have now extended into the Class IV/4designations.

Lightwave safety precautions for optical fiber telecommunication systems

In its normal operating mode, an optical fiber telecommunication system is totallyenclosed and presents no risk of eye injury. It is a Class I/1 system under the FDA andIEC classifications.

The fiber optic cables that interconnect various components of an optical fibertelecommunication system can disconnect or break, and may expose people to laseremissions. Also, certain measures and maintenance procedures may expose thetechnician to emission from the semiconductor laser during installation and servicing.Unlike more familiar laser devices, such as solid-state and gas lasers, the emissionpattern of a semiconductor laser results in a highly divergent beam. In a divergentbeam, the irradiance (power density) decreases rapidly with distance. The greater the

Safety Specific safety areasLaser safety

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

1-9

Page 42: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

distance, the less energy will enter the eye, and the less potential risk for eye injury.Inadvertently viewing an unterminated fiber or damaged fiber with the unaided eye atdistances greater than 5 to 6 inches normally will not cause eye injury provided thepower in the fiber is less than a few milliwatts at the near IR wavelengths and a fewtens of milliwatts at the far IR wavelengths. However, damage may occur if an opticalinstrument such as a microscope, magnifying glass or eye loupe is used to stare at theenergized fiber end.

Important! Use of controls, adjustments and procedures other than those specifiedherein may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure.

Laser safety precautions for enclosed systems

Under normal operating conditions, optical fiber telecommunication systems arecompletely enclosed; nonetheless, the following precautions shall be observed:

1. Because of the potential for eye damage, technicians should not stare into opticalconnectors or broken fibers.

2. Under no circumstance shall laser/fiber optic operations be performed by atechnician before satisfactorily completing training in laser safety.

3. Since viewing laser emissions directly in excess of Class I/1 limits with an opticalinstrument such as an eye loupe greatly increases the risk of eye damage.

Laser safety precautions for unenclosed systems

During service, maintenance, or restoration, an optical fiber telecommunication systemis considered unenclosed. Under these conditions, follow these practices:

1. Only authorized, trained personnel shall be permitted to do service, maintenanceand restoration. Avoid exposing the eye to emissions from unterminated, energizedoptical connectors at close distances. Laser modules associated with the opticalports of laser circuit packs are typically recessed, which limits the exposuredistance. Optical port shutters, Automatic Power Reduction (APR), and AutomaticPower Shut Down (APSD) are engineering controls that are also used to limit theemissions. However, technicians removing or replacing laser circuit packs shouldnot stare or look directly into the optical port with optical instruments ormagnifying lenses. (Normal eyewear or indirect viewing instruments such asFind-R-Scopes are not considered magnifying lenses or optical instruments).

2. Only authorized, trained personnel shall use optical test equipment duringinstallation or servicing since this equipment contains semiconductor lasers. (Someexamples of optical test equipment are Optical Time Domain Reflectometers(OTDR’s), Hand-Held Loss Test Sets).

3. Under no circumstances shall any personnel scan a fiber with an optical test setwithout verifying that all laser sources on the fiber are turned off.

4. All unauthorized personnel shall be excluded from the immediate area of theoptical fiber telecommunication systems during installation and service.

Consult ANSI Z136.2 American National Standard for Safe Use of Lasers in the U.S.or outside the U.S., IEC-60825, Part 2 for guidance on the safe use of optical fiberoptic communication systems in the workplace.

Safety Specific safety areasLaser safety

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-10 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 43: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Power supply safety instructions

Overview

The 1655 AMU units can be powered as follows:

• DC (Main card contains a 3-pin socket block)

• AC (via an external AC/DC converter or equivalent; see chapter 2, section“Powering” (p. 2-2))

Electrical safety

The installation must be compliant with IEC 60950–Ed3, 1999-04.

The equipment must be grounded (connected to protective earth) (Class I equipment).

The –48 V power cables must be disconnected before removing main cards.

DC power supply

Each equipment must be fitted when the equipment is installed, with an external,marked and easily-identifiable protection device of 6,3 A maximum.

The equipment must be supplied with a Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) of –48 Vand the positive terminal of this source correctly connected to the protective earth.

The equipment can also be connected to a Telecommunication Network Voltage (TNV)of –48 V to –60 V. No specific requirements are necessary for this type of source.

The user interfaces are of the SELV type and must only be connected to circuits withthe same type of interface.

The following power range must be observed: –39 VDC ... –72 VDC.

Protection against short-circuits

Important! Ensure that the 1655 AMU units have reached room temperature andare dry before taking them into operation.

Electrostatic discharge

Introduction

Electrostatic discharge (ESD), caused by touching with the hand for example, candestroy semiconductor components. The correct operation of the complete system isthen no longer assured.

Industry experience has shown thatall semiconductor components can be damaged bystatic electricity that builds up on work surfaces and personnel. The electrostaticdischarge can also affect the components indirectly via contacts or conductor tracks.The electrostatic charges are produced by various charging effects of movement and

Safety Specific safety areasPower supply safety instructions

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

1-11

Page 44: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

contact with other objects. Dry air allows greater static charges to accumulate. Higherpotentialsaremeasured in areas with low relative humidity, but potentials high enoughto cause damage can occur anywhere.

The barred-hand symbol

cards containing components that are especially sensitive to electrostatic discharge areidentified by warninglabels bearing the barred-hand symbol.

ESD instructions

The following ESD instructionsmustbe observed when handling main and tributarycards, option cards and/or SFPs:

• Wear working garment made of 100% cotton to avoid electrostatic charging.

• Touch the cards/SFPs at the edges only.

• Ensure that the 1655 AMU units are grounded.

• Wear conductively connected wrist straps and connect them to an ESD bondingpoint.

• Work in an area which is protected against electrostatic discharge. Use conductingfloor and bench mats which are conductively connected to an ESD bonding point.

• Conductively connect all test equipment and trolleys to an ESD bonding point.

• Store and ship the cards/SFPs in their shipping packing. The cards/SFPs must bepacked and unpacked only at workplaces suitably protected against build-up ofcharge.

• Whenever possible, maintain the relative humidity of air above 20%.

Safety Specific safety areasElectrostatic discharge

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-12 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 45: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Conformity statements

CE mark

The CE mark indicates that the product conforms to the relevant European Community(EC) Directives.

This CE-marked unit is compliant with the following Directive:

• EC2004.108/EEC - Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC)

Material content compliance

European Union (EU) Directive 2002/95/EC, “Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances” (RoHS), restricts the use of lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium, and certain flame retardants in electrical and electronic equipment. This Directive applies to electrical and electronic products placed on the EU market from 1 July 2006, with various exemptions, including an exemption for lead solder in network infrastructure equipment. Nokia products shipped to the EU from 1 July 2006 will comply with the RoHS Directive.

Safety Specific safety areasConformity statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

1-13

Page 46: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview
Page 47: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

2 2General information

Overview

Purpose

The purpose of this chapter is to provide important information before performing anyprocedure.

Contents

Hardware description 2-1

Environmental considerations 2-16

EMC/ESD information 2-17

ITM-CIT requirements 2-19

Required tools and test equipment 2-19

Sequence of steps 2-20

Hardware description

Description

The 1655 AMU is a compact SDH Multiplexer, enabling cost-effective STM-1, STM-4and STM-16 Add/Drop Multiplexer solutions. Several mechanical variants are definedto target specific applications. The 1655 AMU 2m/4o has 6 slots (2x main and 4xtributary) and is optimized for high capacity and protected Central Office applications.The 1655 AMU 1m/1o has 2 slots (1x main and 1x tributary) and is targeted for lowercost and unprotected applications. One set of cards and one software load is usedacross the various mechanical configurations of the AMU.

The 1655 AMU start-up configuration includes two main cards; one main card supports2 hot-pluggable STM-1 or STM-4 multirate interfaces and 2 hot-pluggable STM-1single rate interfaces and the other main card supports 2 hot-pluggable STM-1 orSTM-4 multirate interfaces and 2 hot-pluggable STM-4 or STM-16 multirate interfaces.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

2-1

Page 48: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Most of the existing AM/AMS option cards can be fitted via an adapter card, whichoccupies twotributary slots. In the 1655 AMU 2m/4o, a second main card can be fittedfor high-availability configurations or to increase the amount of interfaces.

An overview on the available tributary and option cards is given inTable 2-3,“Available tributaryand option cards” (p. 2-11).

Racks

The 1655 AMU unit can be mounted into 600 mm × 300 mm (W×D) or 600 mm ×600 mm(W × D) racks. However, this manual describes only the subrack installationto ETSI and 19’’ racks.

Depending on the rack height, the maximum number of 1655 AMU units within onerack can vary according to the table below.

Table 2-1 Maximum number of systems within one rack

Rack height Max. numberof 2m/4osubracks

Max. numberof 1m/1osubracks(vertical

mounting)

Max. numberof 2H 1m/1o

subracks(horizontalmounting)

Max. numberof 6 H 2m/4o

subracks(horizontalmounting)

2200 mm 8 20 20 8

2600 mm 10 25 24 10

Powering

The 1655 AMU unit can only be ordered as a DC powered version. The power rangeis given in chapter 3, section“Technical data” (p. 3-2).

However, the 1655 AMU unit can also be AC powered by using an AC/DC converteras described below.

General information Hardware description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-2 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 49: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table 2-2 Technical specifications (AC/DC converter)

Item DRP-240-48converter (forAMU 2m/4o unitswith ESW4_E14option card)

DR-120-48converter (for AMU2m/4o units)

DR-75-48 converter(for AMU 1m/1ounits)

AC input 85 ... 264 VAC 88 ... 132 VAC or

176 ... 264 VAC

(selectable by switch)

85 ... 264 VAC

DC output 48 V, 0 ... 5A 48 V, 0 ... 2.5A 48V, 0 ... 1.6A

Temperaturerange

–10°C ... +70°C –10°C ... +60°C –10°C ... +60°C

Dimensions (H ×W × D)

125.2 mm × 125.5mm × 100 mm

125.2 mm × 65.5 mm× 100 mm

125.2 mm × 55.5 mm× 100 mm

Important! TheAC/DC convertermust be derated to 80% of its maximumcapacity in order to guarantee suitable temperature and lifetime to the equipment.

Therefore, the maximum power usage must be:

• 56 watts for a DR-75-48 converter

• 96 watts for a DR-120-48 converter and

• 192 watts for a DRP-240-48 converter.

Figure 2-1 AC/DC converter

AC/DC converterfor AMU 2m/4o unit

AC/DC converterfor AMU 1m/1o unit

AC side(3 poles)

AC side(3 poles)

DC side(4 poles)

DC side(4 poles)

General information Hardware description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

2-3

Page 50: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Main cards - MI-16/4 and MI-14/4

The following table lists the interfaces supported by the three main cards: MI-16/4,MI-14/4 andMI-16/1

Interfaces MI-16/4 MI-14/4 MI-16/1

Two DC power connectors X X X

Four Miscellaneous Discrete Input (MDI)ports

X X X

Four Miscellaneous Discrete Output(MDO) ports

X X X

A timing input and output for 2 MHzsynchronization (SYNC-I/O) with anRJ45 connector, suitable for symmetricaltwisted pair cables with an impedance of120 Ω. The timing input also supports 75Ω when different pins are used

X X X

A Q-LAN interface for Lucent OMS withan RJ45 connector.

X X X

An F-interface for the ITM-CIT with anRJ45 connector.

X X X

One EOW connector (64 kbit/s) X X

Two USB 1.1 connectors X X X

Two LEDs (red and green) to indicate thestatus of the unit.

X X X

Reset button X X

Interface to the main card

Main Card Interface

MI-16/4 Two STM-1/STM-4 and two STM-4/STM-16 optical lineinterface pairs (transmit/receive). More information is given insection“Pluggable SFPs” (p. 2-8).

MI-16/4 Two STM-1 and two STM-1/STM-4 optical line interface pairs(transmit/receive). More information is given in section“Pluggable SFPs” (p. 2-8).

MI-16/1 1 multirate STM-4/16 interface (pluggable SFPs)

Street cabinet version

The street cabinet versions are a specific configuration of the 1655 AMU.

General information Hardware description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-4 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 51: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

The street-cabinet versions of the AMU are recognized as a specific configuration oftheAMU. This includes the provisioning and control of the applicable mandatory fanunit for this configuration. Two street cabinet versions are available: a 2-slot and a6-slot version. Each version is equipped with a specific fan unit. A fan unit shouldalways be applied and for this reason no fan blank is orderable.

The following figure displays the front layout of a street cabinet.

Overview

The two available versions of 1655 AMU street cabinet are:

• 2-slot version

• 6-slot version.

The following figures display the 2-slot street cabinet version:

The top of the drawing has been removed for viewing clarity. The top cover and fanunit are delivered fixed together. Never remove the top during installation.

General information Hardware description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

2-5

Page 52: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

The following figures display the 6-slot street cabinet version:

The top of the drawing has been removed for viewing clarity. The top cover and fanunit are delivered fixed together. Never remove the top during installation.

General information Hardware description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-6 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 53: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Each version is equipped with a specific fan unit. Always apply the fan unit with thestreetcabinetversion. Therefore, no fan blank is orderable.

Features

• The street cabinet version is optimized for street cabinet applications.

• Although theprimary application are street cabinets, the system can also be appliedin central office application.

• Provisioning and control of the applicable mandatory fan unit for this configuration.

• No configuration restriction exist regarding the type, number and position of a mainor tributary unit.

• The street cabinets are installed and tested as the regular units of 1655 AMU.

• When using in a central office environment, the advantages with the old versionsare:

– optimized for Street-cabinet Environment: 19’’ over 50% space saving

– horizontal mounting and no air-space required above or below system

– 19″ rack height 1m/1o: 2 RU and 2m/4o: 5 RU

• The grounding point for the street cabinet is provided on the faceplate, on the frontright.

Details of horizontal positioning

Street Cabinetversion

Height Depth Width

2-slot 2U (88 mm) 215 mm Suitable forhorizontal mountingin a 19″ or ETSIrack (450 mm).

6-slot 5U (224 mm) 215 mm

This configuration contains a replaceable fan without air-filter.

Fan unit details

No additional mounting brackets are necessary for the fan unit.

General information Hardware description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

2-7

Page 54: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Physical constraints

• Clearance aspects

• Vertical clearanceStreet cabinet shelves do not require clearance between the AMU system and otherequipment mounted directly on top or below the system.

• Horizontal clearanceOn both sides of the system, at least 5 cm of free space should be available. Thisfree space must not be used for cable routing.

• User selectable air-direction selectionThe user can select the air direction to either pushing air towards the main card orpulling air from the main card. The direction of air-flow can be selected from theleft-to-right or right-to-left direction. This is defined during installation and realizedby orientation of the fan unit. The fan unit can be placed or turned in two positionsand in both of these positions, the unit details and air direction can be readnormally.

Environmental conditions

• Temperature range

– The system is certified to work from -5°C to +65°C.

– Because the system is designed to be used in a street cabinet, the temperatureinside the street cabinet must be controlled within the range of -20°C to +65°C.

• System generated heatThe heat generated by the system does the following:

– Warms up the environment after a cold start from a range of -20°C to -5°C.

– Maintains the temperature above the -5°C level after start-up.

• Speed controlledThe fan unit is speed controlled to minimize sonic pollution.

• Requirement for dust free environmentThe environment must be sufficiently dust-free as no air filter is provided. Themaximum dust suspension level as specified by ETSI 300-019-1-3 paragraph 5.4 is0.2 mg/m3.

Pluggable SFPs

The following SFPs are available:

• STM-1, S1.1 (CC: 109469809), short haul, 1310 nm, 15 km

• STM-1, L1.1 (CC: 109469825), long haul, 1310 nm, 40 km

• STM-1, L1.2 (CC: 109469817), long haul, 1550 nm, 80 km

• STM-1, 155E (CC: 109543561), electrical

• STM-1/STM-4, SWF 1-1, (CC: 109559500), 1480/1500 nm, single fiberbidirectional

• STM-1/STM-4, SWF 1-2, (CC: 109559492), 1490/1310 nm, single fiberbidirectional

• STM-4, S4.1 (CC: 109509687), short haul, 1310 nm, 15 km

General information Hardware description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-8 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 55: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

• STM-4, L4.1 (CC: 109509695), long haul, 1310 nm, 40 km

• STM-4, L4.2 (CC: 109509703), long haul, 1550 nm, 80 km

• STM-16, I16.1 (CC: 109509711), 1310 nm, 2 km

• STM-16, S16.1 (CC: 109509729), short haul, 1310 nm, 15 km

• STM-16, L16.1 (CC: 109509737), long haul, 1310 nm, 40 km

• STM-16, L16.2/3 (CC: 109509745), long haul, 1550 nm, 80 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 SH1 (CC: 109620385), short haul, 40 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 SH2 (CC: 109620393), short haul, 40 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 SH3 (CC: 109620401), short haul, 40 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 SH4 (CC: 109620419), short haul, 40 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 SH5 (CC: 109620427), short haul, 40 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 SH6 (CC:109620435), short haul, 40 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 SH7 (CC: 109620443), short haul, 40 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 SH8 (CC: 109620450), short haul, 40 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 LH1 (CC: 109620468), long haul, 80 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 LH2 (CC: 109620476), long haul, 80 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 LH3 (CC: 109620484), long haul, 80 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 LH4 (CC: 109620492), long haul, 80 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 LH5 (CC: 109620500), long haul, 80 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 LH6 (CC: 109620518), long haul, 80 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 LH7 (CC: 109620526), long haul, 80 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 LH8 (CC: 109620534), long haul, 80 km

• GE SX (CC: 109526483), 850 nm, multi-mode 550 m

• GE LX (CC: 109526491), 1310 nm, single-mode 5–10 km

• GE ZX (CC: 109534347), 1550 nm, single-mode 80 km.

• FE 100BASE-LX (CC: 109643759), single mode, 1310nm

• GE - Single fiber working (CC: 109606657), 1310 nm (upstream)

• GE - Single fiber working (CC: 109606665), 1490 nm (downstream)

General information Hardware description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

2-9

Page 56: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figures

NOTES:

• Please note that Nokia warranty is contingent upon the use of Nokia specified SFPs for the 1655 AMU. Use of other SFPs is not approved by Nokiaand is fully at the customer’s own risk. Any warranty obligation of Nokia isextinguished when non- Nokia specified SFPs are used.

• It is not mandatory to have an LBO (Lightguide Build-Out) between the SFP andthe connected optical cable. However, in the case of measurements with opticalloops and/or connecting power meters, an LBO (15 dB) can be required. An LBOcan also be necessary to ensure the correct input power (see chapter 8, section“Optical received power test” (p. 8-2)).

Figure 2-2 Optical SFP module

Figure 2-3 SFP155E module

General information Hardware description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-10 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 57: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Configuration and provisioning

A receptaclefor a pluggable module (SFP) can have the following administrativestates:

• MODULE ACCEPTED –When a module is allowed in a receptacle.

• MODULE REJECTED – When a module is inserted in a receptacle and thismodule is not recognizable or not allowed in this location.

• MODULE NOT PRESENT – When a module is removed from a receptacle.

For each module location, the system can store the parameters of the “Current Module”and the parameters of the “Last Accepted Module”:

• The “Current Module” entry contains the parameters of the module that is currentlyinserted in the receptacle, provided the contents are accessible and have a correctchecksum, otherwise the “Current Module” entry is empty. In case a module isremoved, the “Current Module” entry is cleared.

• The “Last Accepted Module” entry contains the parameters of the module that hasmost recently been accepted in the receptacle. At start-up, this entry is empty. Uponan alarm-free transition to the MODULE ACCEPTED state, the data of the“Current Module” entry is copied to the “Last Accepted Module” entry.

Benefits

The “Current Module” parameters enables the user to view the properties of theinsertedmodule,in case problems arise.

The “Last Accepted Module” parameters provide the user with the “last known good”module data. A comparison of the two can help to determine why a newly insertedmodule does not behave as expected. Once the new module is alarm-free accepted, the“Current Module” data is copied to the “Last Accepted Module” location. The twoentries remain equal until the module is removed.

If qualified and correct speed modules are present, the system will accept and use themwithout further provisioning actions.

Tributary and option cards

The 1655 AMU can be equipped with various tributary and option cards.

Table 2-3 Available tributary and option cards

Tributary/Optioncards

Function Comcode

PI-E1/63 Provides sixty-three 2048 kbit/s ports (120Ω) 109509679

PI-E1/63_75 Provides sixty-three 2048 kbit/s ports (75Ω) 109535468

EPL4_E14 Provides the following interfaces:

• 2 × cages for SFPs (1000Base-X, optical)

• 2 × dual rate Ethernet (10/100Base-T)

• 2 × triple rate Ethernet (10/100/1000Base-T)

• 4 × E1 (120Ω or 75Ω)

109543504

General information Hardware description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

2-11

Page 58: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table 2-3 Available tributary and option cards (continued)

Tributary/Optioncards

Function Comcode

EPL4_E132_75 Provides the following interfaces:

• 4 × dual rate Ethernet (10/100Base-T)

• 32 × E1 (75Ω)

109543520

ESW4_E14 Provides the following interfaces:

• 2 × cages for SFPs (1000Base-X, optical)

• 2 × dual rate Ethernet (10/100Base-T)

• 100BASE-X

• 2 × triple rate Ethernet (10/100/1000Base-T)

• 4 × E1 (120Ω or 75Ω)

109579896

EOP4_E132 The EOP4_E132 unit supports 120Ω E1 interfaces fortwisted pair cabling and provides:

• Two RJ45 connectors for triple rate Ethernet(10/100/1000BASE-T(X)) electrical – twisted pair

• Two RJ45 connectors for dual rate Ethernet(10/100BASE-T(X)) electrical – twisted pair

• Sixteen RJ45 connectors for 32 × E1 interfaces,electrical – twisted pair or coaxial

109683508

EOP4_E132_75 The EOP4_E132_75 unit supports 75Ω E1 interfaces fortwisted pair cabling and provides:

• Two RJ45 connectors for triple rate Ethernet(10/100/1000BASE-T(X)) electrical – twisted pair

• Two RJ45 connectors for dual rate Ethernet(10/100BASE-T(X)) electrical – twisted pair

• Sixteen RJ45 connectors for 32 × E1 interfaces,electrical – twisted pair or coaxial

109683516

SI-14/8 Provides the following interfaces:

• 2 × cages for SFPs (STM-1/STM-4, optical)

• 6 × cages for SFPs (STM-1, optical)

109579904

XE3DS3/3-E14 The E3DS3/3_E14 card provides three switched 34/45Mbit/s interfaces on DIN1.6/5.6 coaxial connectors and 4× E1 interfaces on RJ45 (2 × E1 interfaces per RJ45).

The option card provides four E1 ports with switchableimpedance 120/75Ω and three E3/DS3 ports which areselectable per port.

The circuit pack can be used in tributary slot 1 to 4.

The user can select the mixed E3/DS3 ports per interface,to operate in E3 mode or to operate in DS3 mode.

109655225

General information Hardware description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-12 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 59: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table 2-3 Available tributary and option cards (continued)

Tributary/Optioncards

Function Comcode

X16DS11) Provides sixteen 1.5 Mbit/s (DS1) interfaces.

NOTE: This option card has to be installed into theAdapter Card (AC-1).

108756081

X2E3-V21) Provides two 34 Mbit/s (E3) interfaces.

NOTE: This option card has to be installed into theAdapter Card (AC-1).

108756107

X2DS3-V21) Provides two 45 Mbit/s (DS3) interfaces.

NOTE: This option card has to be installed into theAdapter Card (AC-1).

108756099

X4IP-V21) Provides four 10/100Base-T Ethernet LAN interfaces(TransLAN®).

NOTE: This option card has to be installed into theAdapter Card (AC-1).

108865064

X8PL1) Provides eight 10/100Base-T Ethernet LAN interfaces inPrivate Line mode and supports a flexible allocation ofSDH bandwidth to LAN ports.

NOTE: This option card has to be installed into theAdapter Card (AC-1).

109480707

1) cannot be used within 1655 AMU 1m/1o or 2H subracks because the needed Adaptercard requires two tributary slots.

Fans

An alarm is also raised in the 1655 AMU when an option card detects a temperaturehigher than the temperature range for which the 1655 AMU was designed.

The permissible temperature range (-5°C to +45°C) for an ETSI Class 3.1Eenvironment, consists of a core temperature range of +10°C to +35°C and anexceptional temperature range of -5°C to +45°C. However, there is no impact on thesystem if this alarm is not raised for more than 10% of its lifetime.

General information Hardware description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

2-13

Page 60: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

General information Hardware description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

These hot-pluggable fan units should be installed in the 1655 AMU system according to the existing environmental conditions. The following tables specify the configuration of a fan unit for environmental classes, ETSI Class 3.1 and ETSI Class 3.1E respectively:

Table 2-4 Fan unit configuration according to ETSI Class 3.1

Card Comcode 1655 AMU 2m/4o subrack (CC109509752)

1655 AMU 1m/1o vertical subrack (CC109509760) or (CC109509778)

1655 AMU (1m/1o) horizontal subrack (CC109509778)

MI-16/4 109588954 Natural convection

Natural convection

Natural convection

MI-16/4 109819227 Natural convection

Natural convection

Natural convection

MI-16/1 109671149 Natural convection

Natural convection

Natural convection

MI-14/4 109555516 Natural convection

Natural convection

Natural convection

PI-E1/63 109509679 Natural convection

Natural convection

Natural convection

AC-1 109509653 Natural convection

- -

PI-E1/63_75 109535468 Natural convection

Natural convection

Natural convection

EPL4_E14 109543504 Natural convection

Natural convection

Natural convection

EPL4_E132_ 75 (75Ω)

109543520 Natural convection

Natural convection

Natural convection

EOP4_E132 109683508 Natural convection

Natural convection

Fan

EOP4_E132_ 75 (75Ω)

109683516 Natural convection

Natural convection

Fan

ESW4_E14 109579896 Fan Fan Fan

SI-14/8 109579904 Natural convection

Natural convection

Fan

E3DS3/3_ E14

109655225 Natural convection

Natural convection

Fan

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-14 Nokia – Proprietary See

notice on first page. 365-312-848R6.0

Issue 2 February 2017

Page 61: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table 2-5 Fan unit configuration according to ETSI Class 3.1E

Card Comcode 1655 AMU2m/4osubrack(CC109509752)

1655 AMU1m/1o verticalsubrack(CC109509760)or(CC109509778)

1655 AMU1m/1ohorizontalsubrack(CC109509778)

MI-16/4 109588954 Natural convection Naturalconvection

Naturalconvection

MI-16/1 109671149 Natural convection Naturalconvection

Naturalconvection

MI-14/4 109555516 Natural convection Naturalconvection

Naturalconvection

PI-E1/63 109509679 Natural convection Naturalconvection

Naturalconvection

AC-1 109509653 Natural convection - -

PI-E1/63_75

109535468 Natural convection Naturalconvection

Naturalconvection

EPL4_E14 109543504 Natural convection Naturalconvection

Fan

EPL4_E132_75

109543520 Natural convection Naturalconvection

Fan

EOP4_E132

109683508 Natural convection Naturalconvection

Fan

EOP4_E132_75

109683516 Natural convection Naturalconvection

Fan

ESW4_E14 109579896 Fan Fan Fan

SI-14/8 109579904 Natural convection Naturalconvection

Fan

E3DS3/3_E14

109655225 Natural convection Naturalconvection

Fan

General information Hardware description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

2-15

Page 62: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Environmental considerations

General

The 1655AMU units must have room temperature and must be dry before they can betaken into operation.

NOTES:

• For lifelong warranty of the AMU equipment, the average room temperature shouldbe 25°C. The temperature should be between the range, +10°C - +35°C as stated inETSI EN300 019-1-3 standard.

• The inlet temperature (measured at 3 cm below the subrack) should be compliant toETSI standard EN300 019-1-3 class 3.1E.

• The minimum open space on subrack top and subrack bottom must be 10 cm.

Environmental conditions

The environmental conditions according to ETSI are as follows:

Parameter Unit ETSI Class 3.1 ETSI Class3.1E

Low air temperature °C 5 -5

High air temperature °C 40 45

Figure 2-4 Fan unit

General information Hardware description

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-16 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 63: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Parameter Unit ETSI Class 3.1 ETSI Class3.1E

Low relative humidity % 5 5

High relative humidity % 85 90

Low absolute humidity g/m3 1 1

High absolute humidity g/m3 25 25

Rate of change of temperature °C/min 0.5 0.5

Low air pressure kPa 70 70

High air pressure kPa 106 106

Solar radiation W/m2 700 700

Heat radiation W/m2 600 600

Conditions of condensation – no no

Conditions of wind-driven rain,snow, hail, and so on

– no no

Conditions of water fromsources other than rain

– no no

Conditions of icing – no no

Micro organisms – no no

Rodents, insects – no no

EMC/ESD information

Required connections

The system was developed in compliance with the ETSI Mesh Ground requirements.This means EMC compliance and personnel safety can be achieved only if the systemis connected to a System-Reference Potential Plane (SRPP) at many places asdescribed in ETS 300 253 (see the figure below).

All peripheral equipment and its protective earth/ground must also be connected to theSRPP by one or more fixed wires.

General information Environmental considerations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

2-17

Page 64: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

The EMC/ESD boundary is defined at unit level. The principle is based on the“FaradayCage”theory. If there are covers, then the covers must be closed.

Card and SFP handling

The following ESD instructionsmust beobserved when handling main and tributarycards, option cards and/or SFPs:

• Wear working garment made of 100% cotton to avoid electrostatic charging.

• Touch the cards/SFPs at the edges only.

• Ensure that the 1655 AMU units are grounded.

• Wear conductively connected wrist straps and connect them to an ESD bondingpoint.

• Work in an area which is protected against electrostatic discharge. Use conductingfloor and bench mats which are conductively connected to an ESD bonding point.

• Conductively connect all test equipment and trolleys to an ESD bonding point.

• Store and ship the cards/SFPs in their shipping packing. The cards/SFPs must bepacked and unpacked only at workplaces suitably protected against build-up ofcharge.

• Whenever possible, maintain the relative humidity of air above 20%.

General information EMC/ESD information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-18 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 65: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

ITM-CIT requirements

Requirements

For the ITM-CIT, a personal computer is necessary which fulfils the followingminimum requirements:

• Pentium® processor with450 MHz or higher

• 128 MB RAM or higher

• Keyboard

• Mouse

• 300 MB of free hard-disk drive space

• CD-ROM drive

• Display with 1024 × 768, 16 million colors recommended

• RS-232 communication port (serial asynchronous port)

• Microsoft® Windows® 2000,Windows XP® or Windows Vista®operating system

• ITM-CIT connector (F-interface) cable (one end RS-232 and the other end RJ45modular jack).

The performance can be enhanced by using a higher performance personal computer.Independent of the requirements listed above the minimum requirements of theoperating system must be fulfilled. A CD-ROM containing the ITM-CIT software mustbe available.

Required tools and test equipment

What are the required tools?

A variety of tools is required to carry out the installation procedures. The followingtableprovidesan overview of the required tools.

Quantity Description Comments

1 2 mm screwdriver to be used for the power connector

1 2.5 mm hexagonal wrench(delivered with the fan)

to be used for mounting the fan

1 3 mm hexagonal wrench to be used for mounting the subrack

1 3 mm socket head screwwrench

to be used for physical installation of otherparts

1 ESD wrist strap to be worn when handling cards and SFPs

1 Soldering iron to be used for soldering cables

1 RJ45 crimping tool to be used for terminating RJ45 cables

General information ITM-CIT requirements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

2-19

Page 66: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Quantity Description Comments

1 1.6/5.6 coax crimping tool to be used for terminating 1.6/5.6 coaxcables

1 1.0/2.3 coax crimping tool to be used for terminating STM-1econnections via SFP155E modules

1 PC (Laptop) to be used for NE provisioning via ITM-CIT

Isopropanol, compressedair and wipes

to be used for fiber cleaning

__________________________________________

Test equipment

A variety of test equipment is required to carry out the individual tests. The followingtableprovidesan overview of the required test equipment.

Quantity Description Comments

1 Analyzer

(STM-1/STM-4/STM-16)

to be used for performing some installationtests

1 Optical power meter to be used for measuring the optical outputpower

1 Multimeter to be used for measuring power supplies

1 Ethernet tester to be used for the X8PL option card

1 Adjustable opticalattenuator

to be used for measuring the receiversensitivity.

A 15 dB LBO must be used for optical testloops or for testing the individual ports.

Sequence of steps

Overview

This manual is structured according to the sequence of steps that should be observedwhen installing 1655 AMU units. The table below gives an overview of all neededinstallation steps which are described in detail in the following chapters.

NOTE: The manual also contains background information needed for performing someprocedures. These sections are not reflected in the table below.

Sequence

The following table shows the sequence of steps for installing a 1655 AMU system.

General information Required tools and test equipment

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-20 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 67: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Main task Chapter number Subtask [section/page]

Mechanicalinstallation

3 “Subrack installation” (p. 3-6)(2m/4o) or

“Subrack installation” (p. 3-29)(1m/1o)

“Main and tributary card installation” (p. 3-10)(2m/4o) or

“Main and tributary card installation” (p. 3-36)(1m/1o)

“AM/AMS option card installation” (p. 3-21)(2m/4o only)

“Fan unit installation” (p. 3-23)(2m/4o) or

“Fan unit installation” (p. 3-45)(1m/1o)

External cableinstallation

4 “Power cables” (p. 4-5)

“Ground wiring” (p. 4-10)

“MDI/O cables ” (p. 4-13)

“Station clock cable” (p. 4-21)

“Q-LAN/G-LAN cable” (p. 4-26)

“ITM-CIT interface” (p. 4-28)

“V.11 cable (EOW)” (p. 4-31)

“USB cable” (p. 4-33)

Tributary andoption cardcabling

“PI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75 option cards” (p. 4-35)

“X2E3-V2/E3/DS3_E14 option cards” (p. 4-40)

“X16DS1 option card” (p. 4-41)

“X2DS3-V2 option card” (p. 4-44)

“X8PL and X4IP-V2 option cards” (p. 4-46)

“EPL4_E14 option card” (p. 4-49)

“EPL4_E132_75 option card” (p. 4-51)

“ESW4_E14 option card” (p. 4-53)

“SI-14/8 option card” (p. 4-56)

Fiber cabling “SFP-155E cable” (p. 4-57)

“Fiber cables” (p. 4-61)

Physicalinstallation check

5 “Physical installation” (p. 5-2)

“Cable connections” (p. 5-3)

Powerinitialisation

“Switching on and testing supply voltage” (p. 5-5)

General information Sequence of steps

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

2-21

Page 68: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Main task Chapter number Subtask [section/page]

Softwareinstallation

6 “Installing ITM-CIT” (p. 6-3)

“Installing the fast download application” (p. 6-6)

“Fast NE software download” (p. 6-7)

“Connecting the ITM-CIT to the NE” (p. 6-9)

NE provisioning “NE date and time” (p. 6-14)

“Node creation” (p. 6-16)

“Slot provisioning” (p. 6-19)

“Confirm/Update the MIB” (p. 6-21)

Stand alone tests

(NE tests)

7 “Preparation and test of the AMU subrack” (p. 7-3)

“Preparation of main card equipment protection” (p. 7-4)

“STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 port connection to opticaldistribution frame test” (p. 7-5)

“Main card equipment protection test” (p. 7-10)

“PDH/DSx option card test” (p. 7-13)

“Ethernet Private Line (EPL) option card test” (p. 7-16)

“Switched Ethernet option card test” (p. 7-19)

Link acceptancetests

8 “Optical received power test” (p. 8-2)

“Connection verification test” (p. 8-4)

“Transmission stability test” (p. 8-6)

General information Sequence of steps

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2-22 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 69: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

3 3Mechanical installation

Overview

Purpose

The purpose of this chapter is to explain the hardware installation of 1655 AMU units.

Dependingon the subrack used, the user has to read only one of the followingsections:

• “1655 AMU 2m/4o and 6H installation” or

• “1655 AMU 1m/1o and 2H installation”

The 6H and 2H street cabinets have an integrated fan whose presence is mandatory.

Contents

1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installation 3-2

Technical data 3-2

Subrack installation 3-6

Main and tributary card installation 3-10

AM/AMS option card installation 3-21

Fan unit installation 3-23

1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installation 3-25

Technical data 3-25

Subrack installation 3-29

Main and tributary card installation 3-36

Fan unit installation 3-45

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-1

Page 70: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installation

Overview

Purpose

The purpose of this chapter is to provide all needed instructions for installing a 1655AMU 2m/4ounit or a 6H street cabinet.

Contents

Technical data 3-2

Subrack installation 3-6

Main and tributary card installation 3-10

AM/AMS option card installation 3-21

Fan unit installation 3-23

Technical data

Specifications

A 1655 AMU 2m/4o unit / 6H street cabinet has the following specifications:

Item Quantity/Value

Voltage range DC –48 VDC and –60 VDC

(–39 VDC minimum, –72 VDC maximum)

Voltage range AC

(optional AC/DCconverter needed)

88 ... 132 VAC or 176 ... 264 VAC

(selectable by switch)

85 ... 264 VAC (with ESW4_E14 option card)

Power feed Two power feed (“BATT 1” and “BATT 2”)

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationOverview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-2 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 71: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installation Technical data

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Item Quantity/Value

Maximum power

consumption

Main cards

MI-14/4: 12.5W

MI-16/4(ASC110): 20W

MI-16/4(ASC110B): 32W

MI-16/1: 20W

Tributary cards

PI-E1/63: 10.2W

PI-E1/63_75: 11.3W

EPL4_E14: 14.5W

EPL4_E132_75: 16W

E3DS3/3_E14: 12W

EOP4_E132 (120): 26W

EOP4_E132_75 (75): 26W

ESW4_E14: 32W

SI-14/8: 10W

Adapter card: 4.5W

SFP module: 1.2W

Two fan units: 7WWeight 2m/4o: 6 kg [13.23 lbs] with two main cards and 4

tributary cards

6H: 2.73 kg [6.02 lbs] (including fan)

Dimensions (H × W × D) 2m/4o: 300 mm [11.811’’] × 224 mm [8.819’’] × 217 mm

[8.544’’]

6H: 222 mm [8.740’’] × 450 mm [17.717’’] × 215 mm

[8.465’’]

Layout

The following figure shows a 1655 AMU AMU 2m/4o unit. The front view can be

different depending on the used cards.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-3

Page 72: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure 3-1 1655 AMU 2m/4o unit

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationTechnical data

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-4 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 73: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure 3-2 Rear view of 1655 AMU 2m/4o unit with fans

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationTechnical data

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-5

Page 74: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Subrack installation

Overview

This section describes:

• subrack 2m/4o installation

• subrack 6H installation

Subrack 2m/4o installation

The following topic describes the mounting of an empty 1655 AMU 2m/4o subrack toan ETSI or 19’’ rack.

Rack mounting

Important! Before performing the procedure described below, please be aware ofthe following:

• The minimum distance between the lowest 1655 AMU unit(s) and the rackbottom must be 100 mm.

• If it is required to mount 1655 AMU units upon the others, it must be observedto have a minimum distance of 200 mm [7.874’’] in between (measured fromtop of the lower unit to bottom of the upper unit).

• If any other equipment than 1655 AMU units is mounted within the same rack,it is highly recommended to mount a heat baffle (CC300510120) between the1655 AMU units and the other equipment to assure thermal separation of theunits.

• Depending on the rack type, one of the followingAMU basic mounting kitsisrequired for performing the procedure described below: CC849029335 (forETSI racks) or CC849029343 (for 19’’ racks).

Proceed as follows to mount 1655 AMU 2m/4o units into a rack:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Mount two mounting brackets (bars) which are part of the AMU basic mounting kit tothe rack with three hexagon bolts M6 × 16 and one ESD grounding screw as shown inFigure 3-3, “Bracket mounting” (p. 3-7). The distance must be 250 mm in ETSI racksand 265 mm in 19’’ racks.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Stick the ESD label above the ESD grounding screw.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Mount the empty 1655 AMU 2m/4o subrack to the installed mounting brackets (bars)with four M4 screws as shown inFigure 3-4, “AMU 2m/4o subrack mounting”(p. 3-8).

Note: ETSI brackets are shown in that figure.

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationSubrack installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-6 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 75: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If required,mount a second subrack next to the installed one.

Results

Figure 3-3 Bracket mounting

325 mmRack

Mounting bracket

Mounting bracket ESD label ESD grounding bolt

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationSubrack installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-7

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 76: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Note: In order to upgrade the system with a fan, take the system out of service,removethe system from the rack, replace the brackets and reinstall the system.

Subrack 6H installation

Before you begin

Please note thefollowing before performing the 6H installation procedure:

Clearance The subrack 6H can be mounted directly above another6H or 2H street cabinet as the street cabinet does notneed clearance above or below the shelf.

Figure 3-4 AMU 2m/4o subrack mounting

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationSubrack installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-8 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 77: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Fan direction Preferred fan position is to set an air direction blowingfrom left to right.

In case of other equipment positioned nearby, the airdirection can be reversed by removing the fan unit andreinserting it with the arrow pointing right to left.

Mounting The street cabinet is delivered with 19″ mounting set.Use the ETSI mounting brackets set delivered with theproduct when ETSI mounting is required.

Grounding The street cabinet has a dedicated grounding point forlocations which do not provide a grounded mountingrack. The screw required is of type M5 and is notdelivered with the product.

Procedure

Proceed as follows to install the 6H subrack:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Check the required depth for subrack mounting.

Note: The mounting set provided with the street cabinet is not recessed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Remove the screws from the mounting brackets and adjust the depth to recess thesubrack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Mount the street cabinet to the rack with four M6 × 16 hexagonal bolts. The distancemust be 250 mm in ETSI racks and 265 mm in 19’’ racks.

Note: The M6 × 16 hexagonal bolts are not supplied along with the product.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationSubrack installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-9

Page 78: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Main and tributary card installation

Overview

This sectiondescribes the installation of main and tributary cards and gives anoverview about theslot positions within a 1655 AMU 2m/4o subrack.

Available cards

Figure 3-5 MAIN card MI-16/4

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-10 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 79: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure 3-6 MAIN card MI-14/4

Figure 3-7 TRIB cards PI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-11

Page 80: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure 3-8 TRIB card EPL4_E14

Figure 3-9 TRIB cards EPL4_E132_75

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-12 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 81: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure 3-10 TRIB card ESW4_E14

Figure 3-11 TRIB card SI-14/8

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-13

Page 82: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure 3-12 Adapter card AC-1

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-14 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 83: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure 3-13 E3DS3/3_E14 card

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-15

Page 84: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Configuration rules

The following figure gives an overview about the 1655 AMU 2m/4o slot positions.

Note: All empty slotsmust be covered with AMU blank face plates. The 40 mmversion must be used for MAIN slots, the 32 mm version for the TRIB slots.

Figure 3-14 EOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 cards

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-16 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 85: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Slot Card

MA IN-1 One of the following hot-pluggable main cards:

• AMU MI-16/4

• AMU MI-14/4

• AMU MI-16/1

NOTE: Main cards of the same type must be used in slot MAIN-1and MAIN-2.

MAIN-2

TRIB-1 One of the following hot-pluggable tributary cards:

• AMU PI-E1/63

• AMU PI-E1/63_75

• AMU EPL4_E14

• AMU EPL4_E132_75

• E3/DS3/3_E14

• AMU EOP4_E132 (120Ω)

• AMU EOP4_E132_75 (75Ω)

• AMU ESW4_E14

• AMU SI-14/8

• AMU AC-1 (Adapter Card)NOTE: This Adapter Card requirestwo slots and is needed ifexisting AM/AMS option cards shall be used.

The following AM/AMS option cards can be fitted via an AdapterCard (see section“AM/AMS option card installation” (p. 3-21)):

• X16DS1

• X2E3-V2

• X2DS3-V2

• X4IP-V2

• X8PL

TRIB-2

TRIB-3

TRIB-4

Figure 3-15 Slot positions

MA

IN-1

MA

IN-2

TR

IB-1

TR

IB-2

TR

IB-3

TR

IB-4

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-17

Page 86: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Equipment protection

One main card in slot MAIN-1 is required for normal operation. In a redundantconfiguration,two main cards are needed for equipment protection. Although the twomain cardsarephysically identical, their functional behavior is different. The maincards are functionally separated into two groups: thecore groupincludes thecross-connect, STM-N interfaces, timing and power functions; thecontrol groupincludes the system database and file system and all management protocols andinterfaces. The control group always resides on slot MAIN-1. This implies that allexternal management interfaces (MDIOs, LAN, CIT, EOW, USB and system debugport) are always connected to the card in MAIN-1. The core group supports equipmentprotection and when two main cards are fitted, a failure or removal of one side willtrigger an equipment protection switch.

Card mounting

NOTICE

ESD hazard

Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.

Hold the cards only at the edges or on the screw locks. Always observe the ESDinstructions (see“ESD instructions” (p. 1-12)).

Beforeyou begin with the procedure below, make sure that the required 1655 AMUconfiguration is known. Then proceed as follows to install the main and tributarycards:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Insert the card by holding it at the screw locks, when it is positioned inside the upperand lower guiding extrusions in a horizontal level of the guidings, which does notexceed an angle greater than 15° from the horizontal level of the guides (principle isshown for 1m/1o subrack inFigure 3-35, “Card insertion” (p. 3-42)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Plug the card in the backplane connector of the subrack and secure it via the screwlocks.

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-18 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 87: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Result

Figure 3-16 2m/4o subrack with mounted cards

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-19

Page 88: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Card retraction

Proceedasfollows to remove the main and tributary cards from the subrack:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Loosen the screw locks.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Remove the card by pulling both screw locks. When needed, a screw driver can beused asa lever (see figure below).

Result

Figure 3-17 Card retraction with the help of a screw driver

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-20 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 89: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

AM/AMS option card installation

Overview

This section provides a procedure for installing an AM/AMS option card to theAdapter Card (AC-1).

Before you begin

Please read section“Card and SFP handling” (p. 2-18)before performing the proceduredescribed below.

Procedure

Proceed as follows to install an AM/AMS option card:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Plug the AM/AMS option card (item 1) into the P1 and/or P2 connectors of theAdapter Card (item 2). Make sure the connectors are properly engaged and seated.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Secure the card with six M3 × 6 screws (seeFigure 3-18, “Mounting of an AM/AMSoption card” (p. 3-22)).

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationAM/AMS option card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-21

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 90: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Result

Figure 3-18 Mounting of an AM/AMS option card

P1 P2

1

2

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationAM/AMS option card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-22 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 91: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Fan unit installation

Overview

This section describes the mounting of the fan units to a 1655 AMU 2m/4o unit. Forthe 1655 AMU 2m/4o subrack, two fan units are mounted below the vertical subrack.

Important! Before performing the procedure described below, please ensure thatyou have used theAMU mounting kit, CC849029335 (for ETSI racks) orCC849029343 (for 19″racks) while installing the 1655 AMU 2m/4o subrack to anETSI or 19″rack as given in section,“Subrack installation” (p. 3-6). TheAMUmounting kits, CC109509836 (for ETSI racks) and CC109509810 (for 19″racks),do not facilitate the mounting of a fan unit to the vertical subrack.

Fan unit mounting to a 2m/4o subrack

Proceed as follows to mount two fan units to a 1655 AMU 2m/4o subrack:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Insert four 14 mm standoffs with four M3 spring washers attached to the ends into thefour holes at the rear end of the subrack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Fix four 6 mm M3 screws into these four standoffs.

Note: Do not tighten the screws. The distance between a standoff and the head of ascrew must be 2 mm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Place the fan unit with its slotted holes over the screw heads. Use the hexagon key totighten the screws. The fan unit is now secured to the subrack as shown inFigure3-19, “Fan unit mounting to a 2m/4o subrack” (p. 3-24).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Plug one USB connector to the USB port on one main card and the other USBconnector to the USB port on the other main card to power the fan unit.

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationFan unit installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-23

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 92: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Results

Replacing the fan in a 2m/4o subrack

Proceed as follows to replace a fan in a 1655 AMU 2m/4o subrack:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Unplug the fan to be replaced from the USB port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Loosen the four screws of the mounting plate and pull out the fan.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Slide the fan, sideways, from left to right and remove the fan.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Attach the new fan in the reverse order.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-19 Fan unit mounting to a 2m/4o subrack

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 2m/4o and subrack 6H installationFan unit installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-24 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 93: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installation

Overview

Purpose

The purpose of this chapter is to provide the required instructions for installing a 1655AMU 1m/1ounit or a 2H street cabinet.

Contents

Technical data 3-25

Subrack installation 3-29

Main and tributary card installation 3-36

Fan unit installation 3-45

Technical data

Specifications

A 1655 AMU 1m/1o unit / 2H street cabinet has the following specifications:

Item Quantity/Value

Voltage range DC –48 VDC and –60 VDC

(–39 VDC minimum, –72 VDC maximum)

Voltage range AC

(optional AC/DCconverter needed)

85 ... 264 VAC

Power feed Two power feed (“BATT 1” and “BATT 2”)

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationOverview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-25

Page 94: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Item Quantity/Value

Maximum PowerConsumption

Main cards

• MI-14/4: 12.5W

• MI-16/4: 20W

• MI-16/1: 20W

Tributary cards

• PI-E1/63: 10.2W

• PI-E1/63_75: 11.3W

• EPL4_E14: 14.5W

• EPL4_E132_75: 16W

• E3DS3/3_E14: 12W

• ESW4_E14: 32W

• EOP4_E132 (120Ω): 26W

• EOP4_E132_75 (75Ω): 26W

• SI-14/8: 10W

SFP module: 1.2W

One fan unit: 3.5W

Weight • 1m/1o: 2 kg [4.41 lbs] with one main card and onetributary card

• 2H: 4.52 kg [9.967 lbs] (including fan)

Dimensions (H × W × D) • 1m/1o: 300 mm [11.811″] × 88 mm [3.465″] × 217mm [8.544″]

• 2H: 86 mm [3.386″] × 450 mm [17.717″] × 215 mm[8.465″]

Layout

The following figure shows a 1655 AMU 1m/1o unit. The front view can be differentdepending on the tributary card used.

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationTechnical data

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-26 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 95: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure 3-20 1655 AMU 1m/1o unit

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationTechnical data

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-27

Page 96: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure 3-21 Rear view of 1655 AMU 1m/1o unit with fan

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationTechnical data

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-28 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 97: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Subrack installation

Overview

This section describes:

• subrack 1m/1o installation

• subrack 2H installation

Subrack 1m/1o installation

Important! The following procedure applies to the new perforated subrack(CC109509778), which can be mounted vertically or horizontally. It isrecommended to mount the subrack vertically where long-term operation at a highambient temperature is expected. The subrack, CC109509760, can be mounted onlyvertically and the mounting of this subrack to an ETSI or 19″ rack follow the sameprocedure as described below.

Vertical rack mounting

Important! Before performing the procedure described below, please be aware ofthe following:

• The minimum distance between the lowest 1655 AMU subrack(s) and the rackbottom must be 100 mm.

• If it is required to mount 1655 AMU subracks upon the others, it must beobserved to have a minimum distance of 200 mm [7.874″] in between(measured from top of the lower subrack to bottom of the upper subrack).

• If any equipment other than 1655 AMU units is mounted within the same rack,it is highly recommended to mount a heat baffle (CC300510120) between the1655 AMU units and the other equipment to assure thermal separation of theunits.

• Depending on the rack type, one of the followingAMU basic mounting kitsisneeded for performing the procedure described below: CC849029335 (for ETSIracks) or CC849029343 (for 19″racks).

Procedure

Proceed as follows to mount a 1655 AMU 1m/1o subrack into a rack vertically:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Mount the two mounting brackets (bars) which are part of the AMU basic mounting kitto the rack with three hexagon bolts M6 × 16 and one ESD grounding screw as shownin Figure 3-22, “Bracket mounting” (p. 3-31). The distance must be 250 mm in ETSIracks and 265 mm in 19″racks.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Stick the ESD label above the ESD grounding screw.

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationSubrack installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-29

Page 98: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Mount the empty 1655 AMU 1m/1o subrack to the installed mounting brackets (bars)with two M4 screws as shown inFigure 3-23, “AMU 1m/1o subrack mounting”(p. 3-32).

NOTE: ETSI brackets are shown in that figure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If required, mount further subracks next to the installed one.

Vertical rack mounting

Important! Before performing the procedure described below, please be aware ofthe following:

• The minimum distance between the lowest 1655 AMU subrack(s) and the rackbottom must be 100 mm.

• If it is required to mount 1655 AMU subracks upon the others, it must beobserved to have a minimum distance of 200 mm [7.874″] in between(measuredfrom top of the lower subrack to bottom of the upper subrack).

• If any equipment other than 1655 AMU units is mounted within the same rack,it is highly recommended to mount a heat baffle (CC300510120) between the1655 AMU units and the other equipment to assure thermal separation of theunits.

• Depending on the rack type, one of the followingAMU basic mounting kitsisneeded for performing the procedure described below: CC849029335 (for ETSIracks) or CC849029343 (for 19″racks).

Proceedas follows to mount a 1655 AMU 1m/1o subrack into a rack vertically:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Mount the two mounting brackets (bars) which are part of the AMU basic mounting kitto the rack with three hexagon bolts M6 × 16 and one ESD grounding screw as shownin Figure 3-22, “Bracket mounting” (p. 3-31). The distance must be 250 mm in ETSIracks and 265 mm in 19″racks.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Stick the ESD label above the ESD grounding screw.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Mount the empty 1655 AMU 1m/1o subrack to the installed mounting brackets (bars)with two M4 screws as shown inFigure 3-23, “AMU 1m/1o subrack mounting”(p. 3-32).

NOTE: ETSI brackets are shown in that figure.

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationSubrack installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-30 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 99: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If required,mount further subracks next to the installed one.

Results

Figure 3-22 Bracket mounting

325 mmRack

Mounting bracket

Mounting bracket ESD label ESD grounding bolt

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationSubrack installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-31

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 100: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Horizontal rack mounting

Important! Before performingthe procedure described below, please be aware ofthe following:

• Only the new perforated AMU subrack (CC109509778) can be used.

• The minimum distance between the lowest 1655 AMU subrack and the rackbottom must be 100 mm.

• If it is required to mount 1655 AMU subracks upon the others, it must beobserved to have a minimum distance of 100 mm [3.937″] in between(measured from top of the lower subrack to bottom of the upper subrack).

• If any equipment other than 1655 AMU units is mounted within the same rack,it is highly recommended to mount a heat baffle (CC300510120) between the1655 AMU units and the other equipment to assure thermal separation of theunits.

Figure 3-23 AMU 1m/1o subrack mounting

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationSubrack installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-32 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 101: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

• Dependingon the rack type, one of the followingAMU mounting kitsis neededfor performing the procedure described below: CC849029350 (for ETSI racks)or CC849029368 (for 19″racks).

• The AMU mounting kits, CC109560672 (for ETSI racks) and CC109560664(for 19″ racks), do not facilitate the mounting of a fan unit to the horizontalsubrack. To mount a fan unit to the horizontal subrack, theAMU mounting kit,CC849029350 (for ETSI racks) or CC849029368 (for 19″racks) must be used,which follow the same procedure as described below to mount a 1655 AMU1m/1o subrack to an ETSI or 19″rack horizontally.

Proceed as follows to mount a 1655 AMU 1m/1o subrack into a rack horizontally:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Mount the two mounting brackets which are part of the AMU mounting kit to theAMU subrackasshown in the figures below.

The following screws are necessary:

• Eight M3 × 8 screws (four at each side)

• Two M4 screws (at the front side)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Mount the AMU subrack to the rack.

Results

Note: In order to upgrade the system with a fan, take the system out of service,removethe system from the rack, replace the brackets and reinstall the system.

Figure 3-24 Bracket mounting

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationSubrack installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-33

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 102: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Subrack 2H installation

Before you begin

Please note thefollowing before performing the 2H installation procedure:

Clearance The subrack 2H can be mounted directly above another6H or 2H street cabinet as the street cabinet does notneed clearance above or below the shelf.

Fan direction Preferred fan position is to set an air direction blowingfrom left to right.

In case of other equipment positioned nearby, the airdirection can be reversed by removing the fan unit andreinserting it with the arrow pointing right to left.

Mounting The street cabinet is delivered with 19″ mounting setattached. Use the ETSI mounting brackets set deliveredwith the product when ETSI mounting is required.

Grounding The street cabinet has a dedicated grounding point forlocations which do not provide a grounded mountingrack. The screw required is of type M5 and is notdelivered with the product.

Procedure

Proceed as follows to install the 2H subrack:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Check the required depth for subrack mounting.

Note: The mounting set provided with the street cabinet is not recessed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Remove the screws from the mounting brackets and adjust the depth to recess thesubrack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Mount the street cabinet to the rack with four M6 × 16 hexagonal bolts. The distancemust be 250 mm in ETSI racks and 265 mm in 19″racks.

Note: The M6 × 16 hexagonal bolts are not supplied along with the product.

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationSubrack installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-34 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 103: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Results

Figure 3-25 2H Subrack

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationSubrack installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-35

Page 104: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Main and tributary card installation

Overview

This sectiondescribes the installation of main and tributary cards and provides anoverview about theslot positions within a 1655 AMU 1m/1o subrack.

Available cards

Figure 3-26 MAIN card MI-16/4

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-36 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 105: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure 3-27 MAIN card MI-14/4

Figure 3-28 TRIB cards PI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-37

Page 106: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure 3-29 TRIB card EPL4_E14

Figure 3-30 TRIB cards EPL4_E132_75

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-38 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 107: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure 3-31 TRIB card ESW4_E14

Figure 3-32 TRIB card SI-14/8

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-39

Page 108: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Slot positions

The following figure gives an overview about the 1655 AMU 1m/1o slot positions.

Note: The TRIB slot must be covered with a 32 mm AMU blank face plate if nooption card is inserted.

Figure 3-33 E3DS3/3_E14 card

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-40 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 109: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Slot Card

MA IN One of the following hot-pluggable main cards:

• AMU MI-16/4

• AMU MI-14/4

• AMU MI-16/1

TRIB One of the following hot-pluggable tributary cards:

• AMU PI-E1/63

• AMU PI-E1/63_75

• AMU EPL4_E14

• AMU EPL4_E132_75

• AMU E3DS3/3_E14

• AMU EOP4_E132

• AMU EOP4_E132_75

• AMU ESW4_E14

• AMU SI-14/8

Card mounting

NOTICE

ESD hazard

Electroniccomponentscan be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.

Hold the cards only at the edges or on the screw locks. Always observe the ESDinstructions (see“ESD instructions” (p. 1-12)).

Figure 3-34 Slot positions

MA

IN

TR

IB

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-41

Page 110: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Proceed as follows to install a main and a tributary card:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Insert the card by holding it at the screw locks, when it is positioned inside the upperand lowerguiding extrusions in a horizontal level of the guidings, which does notexceed an angle greater than 15° from the horizontal level of the guides (seeFigure3-35, “Card insertion”(p. 3-42)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Plug the card in the backplane connector of the subrack and secure it via the screwlocks.

Result

Figure 3-35 Card insertion

<15o

<15o

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-42 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 111: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Card retraction

Proceedasfollows to remove the main and tributary card from the subrack:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Loosen the screw locks.

Figure 3-36 1m/1o subrack with mounted cards

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-43

Page 112: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Removethe card by pulling both screw locks. When needed, a screw driver can beused as alever (see figure below).

Result

Figure 3-37 Card retraction with the help of a screw driver

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationMain and tributary card installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-44 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 113: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Fan unit installation

Overview

This section describes the mounting of a fan unit to a 1655 AMU 1m/1o unit. For the1655 AMU 1m/1o vertical subrack, the fan unit is mounted below the subrack and forthe 1655 AMU 2 H (1m/1o) horizontal subrack, the fan unit is mounted to the left ofthe subrack for which specific mounting brackets are used to slide in/out the fan unit.

Important! Before performing the procedure described below, please ensure thatyou have installed the 1655 AMU 1m/1o subrack to an ETSI or 19″rack as givenin section,“Subrack installation” (p. 3-29)

Fan unit mounting to a 1m/1o vertical subrack

Proceed as follows to mount a fan unit to a 1655 AMU 1m/1o vertical subrack:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Insert four 14 mm standoffs with four M3 spring washers attached to the ends into thefour holes at the rear end of the vertical subrack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Fix four 6 mm M3 screws into these four standoffs.

Note: Do not tighten the screws. The distance between a standoff and the head of ascrew must be 2 mm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Place the fan unit with its slotted holes over the screw heads as shown inFigure 3-38,“Fan unit mounting to a 1m/1o vertical subrack” (p. 3-46). Use the hexagon key totighten the screws. The fan unit is now secured to the subrack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Plug the USB connector to the USB port on the main card to provide the fan unit withpower.

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationFan unit installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-45

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 114: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Results

Fan unit mounting to a 1m/1o horizontal subrack

Important! Before performingthe procedure described below, please ensure thatyou have used theAMU mounting kit, CC849029350 (for ETSI racks) orCC849029368 (for 19″racks) while installing the 1655 AMU 1m/1o subrack to anETSI or 19″rack as given in section,“Subrack installation” (p. 3-29). TheAMUmounting kits,CC109560672 (for ETSI racks) and CC109560664 (for 19″racks),do not facilitate the mounting of a fan unit to the horizontal subrack.

Proceed as follows to mount a fan unit to a 1655 AMU 2 H (1m/1o) horizontalsubrack:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Insert four 14 mm standoffs with four M3 spring washers attached to the ends into thefour holeson the left of the horizontal subrack.

Figure 3-38 Fan unit mounting to a 1m/1o vertical subrack

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationFan unit installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3-46 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 115: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Fix two 6 mm M3 screws into two of the standoffs as shown inFigure 3-39, “Fan unitmounting toa 1m/1o horizontal subrack” (p. 3-47).

Note: Do not tightenthe screws. The distance between a standoff and the head of ascrew must be 2 mm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Slide the fan unit through the bracket till the two screws fit into the slotted holes asshown inFigure3-39, “Fan unit mounting to a 1m/1o horizontal subrack” (p. 3-47).Use the hexagonkey to tighten the screws. The fan unit is now secured to the left ofthe subrack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Fasten four bolts into the holes at the four edges of the brackets to keep the unit firmlyin place.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Plug theUSB connector to the USB port on the main card to provide the fan unit withpower.

Results

Note: Refer“Replacingthe fan in a 2m/4o subrack” (p. 3-24)to know how toreplace thefan in a 1m/1o vertical or horizontal subrack.

Figure 3-39 Fan unit mounting to a 1m/1o horizontal subrack

Mechanical installation 1655 AMU 1m/1o and subrack 2H installationFan unit installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

3-47

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 116: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview
Page 117: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

4 4System cabling

Overview

Purpose

The purpose of this chapter is to provide the pin assignments of the unit interfaces andcabling instructions for proper system cabling.

References

Additional cable information is given in the following sections:

• Appendix B, “Cable specifications”

• Appendix C, “Cable assembly instructions”.

Cable routing

Due to the amount of cables, the following routing rules should be regarded:

• The cables should be led within the recommended cable boundary lines accordingto Figure 4-2, “Preferred cable boundary lines” (p. 4-3).

• The cables should always be led at the inside of the rack frame (to rack top orbottom).

• Where possible, the cables should be fixed with (velcro) cablebinders at the squarecutouts of the mounting brackets (seeFigure 4-1, “Cable routing” (p. 4-2)).

• If necessary, use additional cable routing aids like hooks, fiber guides, etc.

• Use a bending radius of at least 30 mm for fiber cables.

The figure below shows a possible cable routing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-1

Page 118: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure 4-1 Cable routing

System cabling Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-2 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 119: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Contents

Power and ground cable installation 4-5

Power cables 4-5

Ground wiring 4-10

External cable installation 4-13

MDI/O cables 4-13

Station clock cable 4-21

Figure 4-2 Preferred cable boundary lines

Cable boundary lines

32

5m

m

500 m

m

to left

to left

to right

to right

System cabling Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-3

Page 120: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Q-LAN/G-LAN cable 4-26

ITM-CIT interface 4-28

V.11 cable (EOW) 4-31

USB cable 4-33

Tributary and option card cabling 4-35

PI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75 option cards 4-35

X2E3-V2/E3/DS3_E14 option cards 4-40

X16DS1 option card 4-41

X2DS3-V2 option card 4-44

X8PL and X4IP-V2 option cards 4-46

EPL4_E14 option card 4-49

EPL4_E132_75 option card 4-51

ESW4_E14 option card 4-53

EOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 option cards 4-53

SI-14/8 option card 4-56

SFP cabling 4-57

SFP-155E cable 4-57

Optical interfaces 4-58

Fiber cables 4-61

System cabling Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-4 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 121: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Power and ground cable installation

Overview

Purpose

This section provides information about the power and ground cable installation.

Contents

Power cables 4-5

Ground wiring 4-10

Power cables

Before you begin

Before connecting any power cables, be sure that all circuit breakers which are locatedin the externalBattery Distribution and Fuse Bay (BDFB) and/or on a PowerDistribution Panel (PDP) are in theOFF position.

Note: The power mustalso be removed from the system in case of extracting amain card.

Important! The power cables should be connected later (see section“Switching onand testingsupplyvoltage” (p. 5-5)).

Cable data

The following figure illustrates the AMU cables with a connector on both end. The farend connector canbe connected to an ADM-Universal Power Distribution Panel (PDP).

System cabling Power and ground cable installationOverview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-5

Page 122: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

The following figure illustrates the AMU cables that have just on one end the powerconnectorfor the AMU

Note: A strain relief is mandatory which requires a tie-wrap for proper working.Safe operation without using a strain relief is not guaranteed.

Table 4-1 Pin assignment (power cables)

Point on Connector Signal Name Color

+ +DC RTN (A and B feeder) Red

– –48/–60 VDC (A and B feeder) Blue

Ground symbol Ground Yellow/Green

Table 4-2 Components (power cables)

Component Part Number

Socket block MC 1.5/3-STF-3.81(preferred)

Lucent: 408887883

Phoenix: 1827716

BL3.81/3F

Weidmuller 1792960000

Strain relief KGG-MC 1.5/3

Lucent: 408887875

Phoenix: 1834356

KGG-MC 1.5/3

Phoenix 1834356

Wire 1.5 mm2

(blue)

Capable: VA3014HH Eldra:90404.01552.016.0084

Belden:415960812000

Lucent: 407529338

Wire 1.5 mm2

(red)

Capable: VA3014DD Eldra:90404.01552.016.0040

Belden:4159600808000

Lucent: 407529361

Wire 1.5 mm2

(yellow/green)

Capable: VA3014FG Eldra:90404.01552.016.0287

System cabling Power and ground cable installationPower cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-6 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 123: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table 4-2 Components (power cables) (continued)

Component Part Number

Wire 0.75 mm2

(blue, red,yellow/green)1)

Nexans: H05V-K

Wire 1.0 mm2

(blue, red,yellow/green)1)

Nexans: H05V-K

Wire 1.5 mm2

(blue, red,yellow/green)1)

Nexans: H07V-K

Cables available for order

The following pre-configured cables can be ordered:

• DC power cable 0.5 m (3 × 1.5 mm) with ADM-U PDP connector— CC408960706

• DC power cable 1.0 m (3 × 1.5 mm) with ADM-U PDP connector— CC408960714

• DC power cable 2.5 m (3 × 1.5 mm) with ADM-U PDP connector —CC408960722.

• DC power cable 0.5 m with open end — CC408883072

• DC power cable 1.0 m with open end — CC408883080

• DC power cable 2.5 m with open end — CC408883098

Direct cable connection

Dependent on the number of main cards used, the power cables must be connected asshown in the figure below.

System cabling Power and ground cable installationPower cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-7

Page 124: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Note: The power failure alarms for the unused power feeds can be set to “notreported”.

Cable connection with AC/DC converter

If an AC/DC converter is used, the DC side needs to be connected to the 1655 AMUand theAC side needs to be connected to a power outlet.

Figure 4-3 Redundant DC power connection

System cabling Power and ground cable installationPower cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-8 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 125: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure 4-4 AC/DC converter connected to one main card

Figure 4-5 AC/DC converter connected to two main cards

System cabling Power and ground cable installationPower cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-9

Page 126: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

The AC/DC converter can be mounted to a DIN rail as shown in the figure below. Ifrequired,circuit breakers could also be installed.

Ground wiring

Required grounding

Only one part of the complete system (PDP, rack, subrack, ...) must be grounded withthe office ground. All the other parts are then grounded as a result of the physicalmounting (physical/electrical connection of device and rackframe).

Additional grounding (optional)

The 1655 AMU units can also be grounded separately. In that case, a grounding cablemustbe usedas specified below.

Table 4-3 Components (grounding cable)

Component Part Number

M3 eye cable tag AMP 34120

M6 eye cable tag AMP 34124

Wire 2.5 mm2 –

A pre-configured grounding cable (0.2 m, 1 × 2.5mm2) canalsobe ordered(CC408883106).

Figure 4-6 DIN rail

+ + - -

Power supply

MW DR-120-48

+ +

- -

CB

1A

CB

2A

Power -48 VDC

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

N LGN

D

Figure 4-7 Grounding cable

M3 M6

System cabling Power and ground cable installationPower cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-10 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 127: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

A pre-configured grounding cable for 6H and 2H subrack (150mm, 1 × 2.5mm2) canalsobe ordered.

Table 4-4 Components (grounding cable)

Component Part Number

M5 eye cable tag AMP 2-34123-1

M6 eye cable tag AMP 34124

Wire 2.5 mm2 –

Figure 4-8 Subrack grounding

System cabling Power and ground cable installationGround wiring

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-11

Page 128: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

The grounding point for the subrack is shown in the figure below:

System cabling Power and ground cable installationGround wiring

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-12 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 129: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

External cable installation

Overview

Purpose

This section provides information about the external system cabling.

Contents

MDI/O cables 4-13

Station clock cable 4-21

Q-LAN/G-LAN cable 4-26

ITM-CIT interface 4-28

V.11 cable (EOW) 4-31

USB cable 4-33

MDI/O cables

General

The four Miscellaneous Discrete Inputs (MDIs) are intended for customer usage. Theinputs can be used to collect status information from the 1655 AMU itself or fromother transmission or non-transmission equipment like power supply systems, intruderdetectors or fire detectors.

Miscellaneous Discrete Inputs

A Miscellaneous Discrete Input (MDI) is active when it is supplied by an externalnominal 24 or 48 VDC voltage. This causes current to flow through the diode part ofthe optocoupler and causes the opto transistor to saturate. The saturated transistor pullsthe GPIO signal to a logic “0”. Each MDI anode and cathode of the optocoupler areconnected to the 25-pins Sub-D connector.

System cabling External cable installationOverview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-13

Page 130: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Easy MDI

The 1655 AMU supports two types of MDI; an external version which requires 18-72Vvoltage andan ’Easy’ version which does not require a power source.

The external physical interface on the 1655 AMU supports four floating MDIs and fournon-floating (Easy) MDIs simultaneously. The MDIs can be floating and non-floatingwith respect to system ground. However, the Easy MDIs are not connected to ground.There is also no pin sharing between the floating MDIs and the easy MDIs. Activationof the floating MDI requires an external voltage in the range of 18-72 V (Imax of 4mAby one input). For more information about cable data for Easy MDI, see“Cable data(Easy MDI)” (p. 4-18).

Figure 4-9 Floating MDI circuit

+3.3V

CKT

GRD

DUAL OPTO-DUAL OPTO-

MDI/MDO

MD

I1_G

PIO

MD

I2_G

PIO

MD

I3_G

PIO

MD

I4_G

PIO

COUPLER COUPLER

CONNECTOR

MDI/MDO

CONNECTOR +3.3V13 12 11 10

24 23 22 21

+ + + +

Figure 4-10 Easy MDI and Floating MDI implementation

System cabling External cable installationMDI/O cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-14 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 131: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Miscellaneous Discrete Outputs

The four Miscellaneous Discrete Outputs (MDOs) can be used to drive signallingdevices or toinfluence the behavior of equipment external to the system. Each GPIOfor the MDO interfaces with a relay driver which controls a mechanical relay. AllMDOs have their common, normally closed (NC) and normally open (NO) contactsbrought to the Sub-D connector. Normally it is the non-energized state of the relaywhich is shown in the figures. When GPIO becomes active, the relay is energized andthe MDO output is activated.

The MDOs shall float with respect to system ground.

An active MDO behaves as a voltage free resistance of less than 10Ω between theoutput connection and its associated return. It is capable of carrying currents of notmore than 0.5 A. An inactive MDO behaves as a voltage free resistance of more than500 kΩ between the output connection and its associated return. It is capable ofwithstanding voltages of not more than 72 VDC.

The MDO contacts are capable of sustaining the product of above mentioned currentand voltage during transitions.

Figure 4-11 MDO circuit

7 5 3 1

208

186

16 1424

System cabling External cable installationMDI/O cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-15

Page 132: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Cable data (MDI/O with floating MDI inputs)

Table 4-5 Pin assignment (MDI/O with floating MDI inputs)

Point onConnector

Signal Name Description Wire

1 MDO4_RTN_CNO Miscellaneous Discrete Output 4return,

contact normally open

1a

2 MDO4_RTN_CNC Miscellaneous Discrete Output 4return,

contact normally closed

2a

3 MDO3_RTN_CNO Miscellaneous Discrete Output 3return,

contact normally open

2b

4 MDO3_RTN_CNC Miscellaneous Discrete Output 3return,

contact normally closed

3b

5 MDO2_RTN_CNO Miscellaneous Discrete Output 2return,

contact normally open

4a

6 MDO2_RTN_CNC Miscellaneous Discrete Output 2return,

contact normally closed

5a

7 MDO1_RTN_CNC Miscellaneous Discrete Output 1return,

contact normally closed

5b

Figure 4-12 Cable design (MDI/O with floating MDI inputs)

System cabling External cable installationMDI/O cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-16 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 133: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table 4-5 Pin assignment (MDI/O with floating MDI inputs) (continued)

Point onConnector

Signal Name Description Wire

8 MDO1_RTN_CNO Miscellaneous Discrete Output 1return,

contact normally open

6b

9 Not connected

10 MDI4_RTN Miscellaneous Discrete Input 4 return 7b

11 MDI3_RTN Miscellaneous Discrete Input 3 return 8b

12 MDI2_RTN Miscellaneous Discrete Input 2 return 9b

13 MDI1_RTN Miscellaneous Discrete Input 1 return 10b

14 MDO4_C Miscellaneous Discrete Output 4,

common point of relay contact

1b

15 Not connected

16 MDO3_C Miscellaneous Discrete Output 3,

common point of relay contact

3a

17 Not connected

18 MDO2_C Miscellaneous Discrete Output 2,

common point of relay contact

4b

19 Not connected

20 MDO1_C Miscellaneous Discrete Output 1,

common point of relay contact

6a

21 MDI4 Miscellaneous Discrete Input 4 7a

22 MDI3 Miscellaneous Discrete Input 3 8a

23 MDI2 Miscellaneous Discrete Input 2 9a

24 MDI1 Miscellaneous Discrete Input 1 10a

25 Not connected

Table 4-6 Components (MDI/O with floating MDI inputs)

Component Part Number

SUB-D 25p female Amphenol: 17DB25S FCI: DB25S065TX AMP: 747364-1

AMP: 786838-1

SUB-D hoodshielded

Amphenol:17DVZK25K1)

– –

10 fold UTP withoverall shield

Nexans: 2PA407 Belden: 46585

Lucent: 407128115

Nexans: ET298841

Lucent: 407128115

System cabling External cable installationMDI/O cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-17

Page 134: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

System cabling External cable installation MDI/O cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1) Metallic hood, 45° cable outlet, cable diameter 4 to 13 mm

Cable data (Easy MDI)

The non-floating MDI (Easy MDI or EMDI) does not require an external power

source. It is recommended that the non-floating MDIs (EMDIs) are not externally

grounded.

Easy MDI is supported on the below mentioned main cards :

ASC101B MI-14/4 (CC: 109555516)

ASC110 MI-16/4 (CC: 109588954)

ASC110B MI-16/4 (CC: 109819227)

ASC114 MI-16/1 (CC: 109671149)

Note: Easy MDI is not supported on the ASC101 MI-14/4 main card (CC:

109509661).

The following figure illustrates the logical implementation for Easy MDI and floating

MDI.

Figure 4-13 Cable design (Easy MDI cable)

Table 4-7 Pin assignment (Easy MDI cable) Point on

Connector Signal Name Description Wire

1 MDO4_RTN_CNO Miscellaneous Discrete Output 4

return,

contact normally open

1a

2 MDO4_RTN_CNC Miscellaneous Discrete Output 4

return,

contact normally closed

2a

3 MDO3_RTN_CNO Miscellaneous Discrete Output 3

return,

contact normally open

2b

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-18 Nokia – Proprietary See

notice on first page. 365-312-848R6.0

Issue 2 February 2017

Page 135: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table 4-7 Pin assignment (Easy MDI cable) (continued)

Point onConnector

Signal Name Description Wire

4 MDO3_RTN_CNC Miscellaneous Discrete Output 3return,

contact normally closed

3b

5 MDO2_RTN_CNO Miscellaneous Discrete Output 2return,

contact normally open

4a

6 MDO2_RTN_CNC Miscellaneous Discrete Output 2return,

contact normally closed

5a

7 MDO1_RTN_CNC Miscellaneous Discrete Output 1return,

contact normally closed

5b

8 MDO1_RTN_CNO Miscellaneous Discrete Output 1return,

contact normally open

6b

9 MDI4A Miscellaneous Discrete Input 4 7a

10 not connected

11 not connected

12 not connected

13 not connected

14 MDO4_C Miscellaneous Discrete Output 4,

common point of relay contact

1b

15 MDI1A Miscellaneous Discrete Input 1 10a

16 MDO3_C Miscellaneous Discrete Output 3,

common point of relay contact

3a

17 MDI2A Miscellaneous Discrete Input 2 9a

18 MDO2_C Miscellaneous Discrete Output 2,

common point of relay contact

4b

19 MDI3A Miscellaneous Discrete Input 3 8a

20 MDO1_C Miscellaneous Discrete Output 1,

common point of relay contact

6a

21 not connected

22 not connected

23 not connected

24 not connected

System cabling External cable installationMDI/O cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-19

Page 136: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table 4-7 Pin assignment (Easy MDI cable) (continued)

Point onConnector

Signal Name Description Wire

25 GRD Ground 7b, 8b, 9b, 10b

Table 4-8 Components (Easy MDI cable)

Component Part Number

SUB-D 25p female Amphenol: 17DB25S FCI: DB25S065TX AMP: 747364-1

AMP: 786838-1

SUB-D hoodshielded

Amphenol:17DVZK25K1)

– –

10 fold UTP withoverall shield

Nexans: 2PA407 Belden: 46585

Lucent: 407128115

Nexans: ET298841

Lucent: 407128115

1) Metallic hood, 45° cable outlet, cable diameter 4 to 13 mm

Additional information

Please be aware of the following concerning easy MDI cables:

• Input requirements: “active”→ 10 Ω, “inactive” → 200 kΩ

• EMDI can be mixed with MDI.

Cable connection

Please connect the MDI/MDO cable as shown in the figure below.

System cabling External cable installationMDI/O cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-20 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 137: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Note: The routing of the MDI/MDO cable should be in accordance with therecommendedpractices of the cable selected. The cable should be strain relieved toprevent any force from being exerted on the connectors. See also section “Cablerouting” at the beginning of this chapter.

Station clock cable

Purpose

The station clock cable is used for connecting an external clock source to the 1655AMU NE.

Figure 4-14 MDI/MDO cable connection

System cabling External cable installationMDI/O cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-21

Page 138: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Cable data (100/120 Ω)

Table 4-9 Pin assignment (station clock cable, 100/120 Ω)

Point onConnector

Signal Name Description Wire

1 STCLK_OUTP Station Clock Output, Positive 1a

2 STCLK_OUTN Station Clock Output, Negative 1b

3 Not connected

4 STCLK_INP Station Clock Input, Positive 3a

5 STCLK_INN Station Clock Input, Negative 3b

6 Not connected

7 GRD Ground 4a

8 GRD Ground 4b

Table 4-10 Components (station clock cable, 100/120 Ω)

Component Part Number

Modular plug (RJ45)shielded

Marenq: T8STMAR-6 Marenq: T8STMAR-1

100 Ω cable Nexans: ET2PA324 Belden: YE00335

Modular plug (RJ45)shielded

Marenq: T8STMAR-1 Marenq:T8STMAR-1

Marenq:T8STMAR-1

120 Ω cable Nexans: ET2PF947 Belden: 46040

Lucent:848004503

Nexans: 296452

Lucent:848004503

Cables available for order (120 Ω)

The following pre-configured 120Ω cablescanbe ordered:

• Station clock cable 2 m (RJ45, S-FTP) — CC408882660

• Station clock cable 5 m (RJ45, S-FTP) — CC408882678

Figure 4-15 Cable design (station clock cable, 100/120 Ω)

RJ45 shielded plugSite specific length

to customerequipment

to AMU MAIN-1

1 8

(rear view)

System cabling External cable installationStation clock cable

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-22 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 139: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

• Stationclock cable 10 m (RJ45, S-FTP) — CC408882686

• Stationclock cable 15 m (RJ45, S-FTP) — CC408882694.

Cables available for order (100 Ω)

The following pre-configured 100Ω cables can beordered:

• Station clock cable 1 m (RJ45, S-FTP) — CC408882751

• Station clock cable 2 m (RJ45, S-FTP) — CC408882769

• Station clock cable 5 m (RJ45, S-FTP) — CC408882777

• Station clock cable 10 m (RJ45, S-FTP) — CC408882785

• Station clock cable 15 m (RJ45, S-FTP) — CC408882793.

Cables available for order (100 Ω, for high density installation)

The following pre-configured 100Ω cables canbe ordered for high densityinstallation:

• Station clock cable 1 m (RJ45, S-FTP) — CC408882702

• Station clock cable 2 m (RJ45, S-FTP) — CC408882710

• Station clock cable 5 m (RJ45, S-FTP) — CC408882728

• Station clock cable 10 m (RJ45, S-FTP) — CC408882736

• Station clock cable 15 m (RJ45, S-FTP) — CC408882744.

Cable data (75 Ω)

Table 4-11 Pin assignment (station clock cable, 75 Ω)

Point on Connector Signal Name Description

1 STCLK_OUTP Station Clock Output, Positive

2 STCLK_OUTN Station Clock Output, Negative

3 Not connected

4 STCLK_INP Station Clock Input, Positive

5 STCLK_INN Station Clock Input, Negative

Figure 4-16 Cable design (station clock cable, 75 Ω)

1 8

RJ45 shielded plugSite specific length

6x 0.4 mm soldered wires,overall diameter 0.70 to 0.86 mm1

5

42

78

to customerequipment

to AMU MAIN-1

2x insulation

(rear view)

System cabling External cable installationStation clock cable

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-23

Page 140: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table 4-11 Pin assignment (station clock cable, 75 Ω) (continued)

Point on Connector Signal Name Description

6 Not connected

7 GRD Ground

8 GRD Ground

Table 4-12 Components (station clock cable, 75 Ω)

Component Part Number

Modular plug (RJ45) shielded Marenq: T8STMAR-6

Coax plug (if required) Bueschel 007 18000 302008 (full crimp type)

Insulation RNF heat shrink tubing Tyco 1.6 mm→ 0.8 mm eg RS666-852

75 Ω cable Belden: 46160 Telco 0.25-1.45 ES-2.6-H

Lucent: 407529262

Nexans: ET 288526

Lucent: 407529262

Note: Due to small cable diameter copper foil and crimp sleeve for supportingcrimp are required.

Cables available for order (75 Ω)

The following pre-configured 75Ω cables can be ordered:

• Station clock cable 2 m (RJ45, 2 fold coax) — CC408882892

• Station clock cable 5 m (RJ45, 2 fold coax) — CC408882900

• Station clock cable 10 m (RJ45, 2 fold coax) — CC408882918

• Station clock cable 15 m (RJ45, 2 fold coax) — CC408882926.

Cable connection

Please connect the station clock cable as shown in the figure below.

System cabling External cable installationStation clock cable

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-24 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 141: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Note: The routing of the station clock cable should be in accordance with therecommendedpractices of the cable selected. The cable should be strain relieved toprevent any force from being exerted on the connectors. See also section “Cablerouting” at the beginning of this chapter.

Figure 4-17 Station clock cable connection

System cabling External cable installationStation clock cable

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-25

Page 142: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Q-LAN/G-LAN cable

Purpose

The Q-LAN cable is used for connecting the Lucent OMS management system to the1655 AMU NE.

The G-LAN cable is used for maintenance purposes and using the fast downloadapplication (see chapter 6, section“Fast NE software download” (p. 6-7)).

Cable data (100 Ω, symmetrical)

Table 4-13 Pin assignment (Q-LAN/G-LAN cable)

Point onConnector

Signal Name(Q-LAN/G-LAN)

Description Wire

1 TX_P Transmit-data positive 1a

2 TX_N Transmit-data negative 1b

3 RX_P Receive-data positive 2a

4 Not connected

5 Not connected

6 RX_N Receive-data negative 2b

7 Not connected

8 Not connected

Table 4-14 Components (Q-LAN/G-LAN cable)

Component Part Number

Modular plug (RJ45)shielded without liner

Marenq: T8STMAR-1 BeeOne: TD108A

100 Ω cable Marenq: CAT5e-STP-128-MAR-grey(stranded)

Marenq: CAT5e-STP-129-MAR-grey(solid)

BeeOne: IBM ACS BronzeS-FTP grey

Figure 4-18 Cable design (Q-LAN/G-LAN cable)

RJ45 shielded plugSite specific length

to customerequipment

to AMU MAIN-1

1 8

(rear view)

System cabling External cable installationQ-LAN/G-LAN cable

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-26 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 143: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Cable connection

Pleaseconnectthe Q-LAN and G-LAN cables as shown in the figures below.

Figure 4-19 Q-LAN cable connection

System cabling External cable installationQ-LAN/G-LAN cable

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-27

Page 144: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Note: The routing of the Q-LAN and G-LAN cables should be in accordance withthe recommended practices of the cables selected. The cables should be strainrelieved to prevent any force from being exerted on the connectors. See alsosection “Cable routing” at the beginning of this chapter.

ITM-CIT interface

Purpose

This cableis used for connecting a local ITM-CIT management system to the 1655AMU NE.

Figure 4-20 G-LAN cable connection

System cabling External cable installationQ-LAN/G-LAN cable

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-28 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 145: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Cable data

Table 4-15 Pin assignment (ITM-CIT cable)

Point on Connector(RJ45)

Point on Connector(SUB-D)

Signal Name Description

1 1 Not connected

2 7 CTS Clear To Send

3 5 GRD Ground

4 2 TXD Transmitted Data

5 3 RXD Received Data

6 8 RTS Request To Send

7 4, 6 DTR Data Terminal Ready

8 9 Not connected

Table 4-16 Components (ITM-CIT cable)

Component Part Number

Modular plug(RJ45) shielded

Marenq: T8STMAR-1

SUB-D 9pinfemale

Amphenol: 17DA09S

FCI: DE09S065T

AMP: 747905-5

SUB-D hoodshielded

FCI: 8655MH0911

Amphenol: 17DVZK9K

100 Ω cable Belden: YE00335 – –

120 Ω cable Belden: 46040 Nexans: 2PF947 Nexans: 296452

Lucent: 848004503

Figure 4-21 Cable design (ITM-CIT cable)

1 8

RJ45 shielded plugSite specific length

to PC (ITM-CIT)to AMU MAIN-1

1

3

45

7

6

2

8

1

3

4

5

7

62

8

9

White-Orange

Orange

White-Green

Green

Blue

White-Blue

White-Brown

Brown

Braid to metal shield plug

SUB-D, 9-pin, female

(rear view)

System cabling External cable installationITM-CIT interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-29

Page 146: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Note: A standard CAT5 cable with special plug (9 pin SUB-D to RJ45) can also beused.

Cables available for order

The following pre-configured cables can be ordered:

• ITM-CIT cable 4m (RJ45 – S-FTP, 100Ω) — CC408882603

• ITM-CIT cable 4 m (RJ45 – UTP CAT5) — CC408882611.

All cables have a 9 pin SUB-D connector (female).

Cable connection

Please connect the ITM-CIT cable as shown in the figure below:

Note: The routing of the ITM-CIT cable should be in accordance with therecommended practices of the cable selected. The cable should be strain relieved toprevent any force from being exerted on the connectors. See also section “Cablerouting ” at the beginning of this chapter.

Figure 4-22 ITM-CIT cable connection

System cabling External cable installationITM-CIT interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-30 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 147: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

V.11 cable (EOW)

Purpose

The V.11 cable is used for connecting an Engineering Order Wire (EOW) to the 1655AMU NE.

Cable data

Table 4-17 Pin assignment (V.11 cable)

Point on Connector Signal Name Description Wire

1 GRD Ground 7a

2 V11RCP Receive Clock Output, Positive 1a

3 V11RSP Receive Synch Output, Positive 2a

4 V11RDP Receive Data Input, Positive 3a

5 V11TCP Transmit Clock Output, Positive 4a

6 V11TSP Transmit Synch Output, Positive 5a

7 V11TDP Transmit Data Output, Positive 6a

8 not connected

9 V11RCN Receive Clock Output, Negative 1b

10 V11RSN Receive Synch Output, Negative 2b

11 V11RDN Receive Data Input, Negative 3b

12 GRD Ground 7b

13 V11TCN Transmit Clock Output, Negative 4b

14 V11TSN Transmit Synch Output, Negative 5b

15 V11TDN Transmit Data Output, Negative 6b

Figure 4-23 Cable design (V.11 cable)

1

8

9

15

SUB-D 15p male (shielded)

Site specific length

to customerequipment

to AMU MAIN-1

System cabling External cable installationV.11 cable (EOW)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-31

Page 148: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table 4-18 Components (V.11 cable)

Component Part Number

SUB-D 15p male Amphenol: 17DA15P

FCI: DA15P065TX

AMP: 747908-2

SUB-D hood shielded Amphenol: 17DVZK15K1)

10 fold UTP withoverall shield

Nexans: 2PA407 Belden: 46585

Lucent: 407128115

Nexans: ET298841

Lucent: 407128115

1) Metallic hood 45° cable outlet, cable diameter 4 to 13 mm

Cable available for order

A pre-configured V.11 cable (10 × 2 × 0.4 mm2, FTP, length: 2 m) with a 15pinSUB-D connector (male) can be ordered (CC408882801).

Cable connection

Please connect the V.11 cable as shown in the figure below.

System cabling External cable installationV.11 cable (EOW)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-32 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 149: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Note: The routing of the V.11 cable should be in accordance with the recommendedpracticesof the cable selected. The cables should be strain relieved to prevent anyforce from being exerted on the connectors. See also section “Cable routing” atthe beginning ofthis chapter.

USB cable

Purpose

The USB ports are used to control and monitor external devices (e.g. fan units or anexternal equipmentprotectionbox).

Cable data

The USB cables (male USB-A to male USB-B) and USB extension cables (maleUSB-A to maleUSB-A) are available from a wide range of vendors, most commonlengths are:

• 3 ft (91 cm)

• 6 ft (183 cm)

Figure 4-24 V.11 cable connection

System cabling External cable installationV.11 cable (EOW)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-33

Page 150: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

• 10 ft (305 cm)

• 15 ft (457 cm).

The total USB link length should not exceed 15 ft (457 cm). The USB cable shouldcomply with the Universal Serial Bus Specification Revision 1.1 of September 23,1998.

Note: A standard industry cable can be used.

Cable connection

Please connect the USB cable as shown in the figure below.

Note: When installingtwo fan units to the 1655 AMU 2m/4o subrack, connect boththe fan units to two separate main cards.

Note: The routing of the USB cable should be in accordance with therecommended practices of the cable selected. The cable should be strain relieved toprevent any force from being exerted on the connectors. See also section “Cablerouting” at the beginning of this chapter.

Figure 4-25 USB cable connection

System cabling External cable installationUSB cable

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-34 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 151: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Tributary and option card cabling

Overview

Purpose

This section provides information about the cabling of the tributary and option cards.

Contents

PI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75 option cards 4-35

X2E3-V2/E3/DS3_E14 option cards 4-40

X16DS1 option card 4-41

X2DS3-V2 option card 4-44

X8PL and X4IP-V2 option cards 4-46

EPL4_E14 option card 4-49

EPL4_E132_75 option card 4-51

ESW4_E14 option card 4-53

EOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 option cards 4-53

SI-14/8 option card 4-56

PI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75 option cards

Purpose

The E1 cable is used for connecting 2048 kbit/s E1 inputs and outputs to the 1655AMU NE.

Cable data (120 Ω, symmetrical)

Figure 4-26 Cable design (E1 cable, 120 Ω symmetrical)

RJ45 shielded plugSite specific length

to DDFto tributary card

1 8

(rear view)

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingOverview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-35

Page 152: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table 4-19 Pin assignment (E1 cable, 120 Ω symmetrical)

Point on Connector Signal Name Description Wire

1 TX120_P_1 Transmit Positive 1 1a

2 TX120_N_1 Transmit Negative 1 1b

3 TX120_P_2 Transmit Positive 2 2a

4 RX120_P_1 Receive Positive 1 3a

5 RX120_N_1 Receive Negative 1 3b

6 TX120_N_2 Transmit Negative 2 2b

7 RX120_P_2 Receive Positive 2 4a

8 RX120_N_2 Receive Negative 2 4b

Table 4-20 Components (E1 cable, 120 Ω symmetrical)

Component Part Number

Not for high density installation Preferred for highdensity installation

Modular plug(RJ45)shielded

Marenq: T8STMAR-1 Marenq:T8STMAR-6

100 Ω cable Belden:YE00335

– – Nexans: 2PA3241)

120 Ω cable Belden:46040

Nexans:2PF947

Nexans: 296452

Lucent: 848004503

1) Use crimp sleeve under bread. High density cable diameter max. 4.2 mm

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingPI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75 option cards

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-36 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 153: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Cable data (75 Ω, coaxial)

Table 4-21 Pin assignment (E1 cable, 75 Ω coaxial)

Plug number Point on Connector Signal Name Description Wire

Plug 1 1 TX75_1 Transmit 1 (braid) 1a

2 Transmit 1 1b

3 TX75_2 Transmit 2 (braid) 2a

4 RX75_1 Receive 1 (braid) 3a

5 Receive 1 3b

6 TX75_2 Transmit 2 2b

7 RX75_2 Receive 2 (braid) 4a

8 Receive 2 4b

Figure 4-27 Cable design (E1 cable, 75 Ω coaxial)

RJ45 shielded plug Site specific length

to DDFto tributary card

(rear view)

1 8

1 8

8x coax

Plug 1

Plug 2

0.4 mm soldered wires,overall diameter 0.70 to 0.86 mm

Shield Contact to metalcrimp RJ45 plug

Braid

Insulation

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingPI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75 option cards

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-37

Page 154: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table 4-21 Pin assignment (E1 cable, 75 Ω coaxial) (continued)

Plug number Point on Connector Signal Name Description Wire

Plug 2 1 TX75_3 Transmit 3 (braid) 1a

2 Transmit 3 1b

3 TX75_4 Transmit 4 (braid) 2a

4 RX75_3 Receive 3 (braid) 3a

5 Receive 3 3b

6 TX75_4 Transmit 4 2b

7 RX75_4 Receive 4 (braid) 4a

8 Receive 4 4b

Table 4-22 Components (E1 cable, 75 Ω coaxial)

Component Part Number

Modular plug (RJ45)shielded

Marenq: T8STMAR-6

Coax plug Bueschel 007 18000 302008 (full crimp type)

8-fold 75 Ω cable Nexans: ET2PB556

Lucent: 408386498

Belden: 46169

Nexans: 267380

Lucent: 407529478

Belden: 46161

Lucent: 408386522

Note: Cable assembly instructions are given in Appendix C, section“Mounting 4× 2.5 mm coax (75Ω) to RJ45 connector” (p. C-8).

Cables available for order (75 Ω)

The following pre-configured 75Ω cables can be ordered:

• E1 cable 2 m (2 × RJ45, 8 fold coax) — CC408882850

• E1 cable 5 m (2 × RJ45, 8 fold coax) — CC408882868

• E1 cable 10 m (2 × RJ45, 8 fold coax) — CC408882876

• E1 cable 15 m (2 × RJ45, 8 fold coax) — CC408882884.

Cable connection

Please connect the E1 cables as shown in the figure below.

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingPI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75 option cards

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-38 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 155: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Note: The routing of the E1 cables should be in accordance with the recommendedpracticesof the cables selected. The cables should be strain relieved to prevent anyforce from being exerted on the connectors. See also section “Cable routing” atthe beginning ofthis chapter.

Figure 4-28 E1 cable connection

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingPI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75 option cards

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-39

Page 156: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

X2E3-V2/E3/DS3_E14 option cards

Purpose

The E3 cable is used for connecting 34368 kbit/s E3 inputs and outputs to the 1655AMU NE.

Cable data (75 Ω)

Table 4-23 Components (E3 cable)

Component Part Number

1.6/5.6 rightangle maleconnector

Radial: R129 187 022 Rosenberger:88S203-3K2

Single 75Ω coax Belden: 46114

Lucent: 848068607

Nexans: 2PA329

Lucent: 848063607

Nexans: NCX1 391397

Note: Only 45° or 90° angled connectors can be used.

Cables available for order

The following pre-configured cables can be ordered:

• E3 coax cable2 m (1.6/5.6 angle) — CC408882975

• E3 coax cable 5 m (1.6/5.6 angle) — CC408882983

• E3 coax cable 10 m (1.6/5.6 angle) — CC408882991

• E3 coax cable 15 m (1.6/5.6 angle) — CC408883007

• E3 coax cable 20 m (1.6/5.6 angle) — CC408883015.

Cable connection

Please connect the E3 cables as shown in the figure below.

Figure 4-29 Cable design (E3 cable)

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingX2E3-V2/E3/DS3_E14 option cards

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-40 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 157: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Note: The routing of the E3 cables should be in accordance with the recommendedpracticesof the cables selected. The cables should be strain relieved to prevent anyforce from being exerted on the connectors. See also section “Cable routing” atthe beginning ofthis chapter.

X16DS1 option card

Purpose

The DS1 cable is used for connecting 1544 kbit/s DS1 inputs and outputs to the 1655AMU NE.

Figure 4-30 E3 cable connection

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingX2E3-V2/E3/DS3_E14 option cards

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-41

Page 158: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Cable data (100 Ω)

Table 4-24 Pin assignment (DS1 cable)

Point on Connector Signal Name Description Wire

1 TX100_P_1 Transmit Positive 1 1a

2 TX100_N_1 Transmit Negative 1 1b

3 not connected

4 RX100_P_1 Receive Positive 1 3a

5 RX100_N_1 Receive Negative 1 3b

6 not connected

7 not connected

8 not connected

Table 4-25 Components (DS1 cable)

Component Part Number

Modular plug (RJ45)shielded

Marenq: T8STMAR-1 T8STMAR-6

100 Ω cable Belden: YE00335 Nexans: ET2PA324

Cable connection

Please connect the DS1 cables as shown in the figure below:

Figure 4-31 Cable design (DS1 cable)

RJ45 shielded plugSite specific length

to DDFto tributary card

1 8

(rear view)

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingX16DS1 option card

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-42 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 159: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure 4-32 DS1 cable connection

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingX16DS1 option card

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-43

Page 160: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Note: The routing of the DS1 cables should be in accordance with therecommendedpractices of the cables selected. The cables should be strain relievedto prevent any force from being exerted on the connectors. See also section “Cablerouting” at the beginning of this chapter.

X2DS3-V2 option card

Purpose

The DS3 cable is used for connecting 44736 kbit/s DS3 inputs and outputs to the 1655AMU NE.

Cable data (75 Ω)

Table 4-26 Components (DS3 cable)

Component Part Number

1.6/5.6 rightangle maleconnector

Radial: R129 187 022 Rosenberger:88S203-3K2

Single 75Ω coax Belden: 46114

Lucent: 848068607

Nexans: 2PA329

Lucent: 848063607

Nexans: NCX1 391397

Note: Only 45° or 90° angled connectors can be used.

Cables available for order

The following pre-configured cables can be ordered:

• DS3 coaxcable2 m (1.6/5.6 angle) — CC408882975

• DS3 coax cable 5 m (1.6/5.6 angle) — CC408882983

• DS3 coax cable 10 m (1.6/5.6 angle) — CC408882991

• DS3 coax cable 15 m (1.6/5.6 angle) — CC408883007

• DS3 coax cable 20 m (1.6/5.6 angle) — CC408883015.

Cable connection

Please connect the DS3 cables as shown in the figure below.

Figure 4-33 Cable design (DS3 cable)

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingX16DS1 option card

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-44 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 161: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure 4-34 DS3 cable connection

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingX2DS3-V2 option card

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-45

Page 162: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Note: The routing of the DS3 cables should be in accordance with therecommendedpractices of the cables selected. The cables should be strain relievedto prevent any force from being exerted on the connectors. See also section “Cablerouting” at the beginning of this chapter.

X8PL and X4IP-V2 option cards

Purpose

The LAN cables described below are used for connecting the 1655 AMU NE toEthernet LAN(10/100/1000Base-T).

Cable data (100 Ω, symmetrical)

Table 4-27 Pin assignment (LAN cable - E/FE)

Point on Connector Signal Name Description Wire

1 TXDP Transmit Data, Positive 1a

2 TXDN Transmit Data, Negative 1b

3 RXDP Receive Data, Positive 2a

4 Not connected

5 Not connected

6 RXDN Receive Data, Negative 2b

7 Not connected

8 Not connected

Table 4-28 Components (LAN cable - E/FE/GE)

Component Part Number

Modular plug (RJ45) shielded Marenq: T8STMAR-1 BeeOne: TD108A

Figure 4-35 Cable design (LAN cable - E/FE)

RJ45 shielded plugSite specific length

to DDFto option card

1 8

(rear view)

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingX2DS3-V2 option card

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-46 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 163: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table 4-28 Components (LAN cable - E/FE/GE) (continued)

Component Part Number

CAT5 STP/FTP Marenq: CAT5e-STP-128-MAR-grey (stranded)

Marenq: CAT5e-STP-129-MAR-grey (solid)

BeeOne: IBM ACSBronze S-FTP grey

Note: Standard CAT5 LAN cables can also be used.

Cable data - GE

The following figure displays the cable desgin for the Gigabit Ethernet (GE) LANcable. As GEinterfaces are bidirectional, the MDI wiring conforms to the IEEE802.3-2002 standard. Based on this standard, the MDI-X (cross-over) functions forbidirectional GE interfaces are not compatible with the MDI-X functions for E/FEinterfaces.

The following figure displays the MDI connector for MDI-X functions and is denotedwith the symbol ’X’.

Table 4-29 Pin assignment (LAN cable - GE)

Point on Connector Signal Name MDI ConnectorSignal Name

Description

1 BI_DA + BI_DB + Bidirectional data,poistive

2 BI_DA - BI_DB - Bidirectional data,negative

3 BI_DB + BI_DA + Bidirectional data,positive

4 BI_DC + BI_DD + Bidirectional data,positive

5 BI_DC - BI_DD - Bidirectional data,negative

6 BI_DB - BI_DA - Bidirectional data,negative

7 BI_DD + BI_DC + Bidirectional data,positive

Figure 4-36 Cable design (LAN cable - GE)

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingX8PL and X4IP-V2 option cards

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-47

Page 164: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table 4-29 Pin assignment (LAN cable - GE) (continued)

Point on Connector Signal Name MDI ConnectorSignal Name

Description

8 BI_DD - BI_DC - Bidirectional data,negative

Cable connection

Please connect the LAN cables as shown in the figure below.

Note: The routing of the LAN cables should be in accordance with therecommended practices of the cable selected. The cable should be strain relieved toprevent any force from being exerted on the connectors. See also section “Cablerouting” at the beginning of this chapter.

Figure 4-37 LAN cable connection

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingX8PL and X4IP-V2 option cards

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-48 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 165: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

EPL4_E14 option card

Interfaces

The EPL4_E14 option card provides the following interfaces:

• Two cages for Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) optical transceivers whichsupport 1000Base-X

• Two RJ45 connectors for triple rate Ethernet (10/100/1000Base-T)

• Two RJ45 connectors for dual rate Ethernet (10/100Base-T)

• Two RJ45 connectors for four E1 interfaces with 75/120Ω (Selection can be madeon port level via the user interface; default: 120Ω).

Cable data (10/100/1000Base-T)

The Ethernet LAN cable specification is given in section“X8PL and X4IP-V2 optioncards” (p. 4-46).

Cable data (E1)

The E1 cable specification is given in section“PI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75 optioncards” (p. 4-35).

Cable connection

Please connect the cables as shown in the figure below:

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingEPL4_E14 option card

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-49

Page 166: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Note: The routing of the cables should be in accordance with the recommendedpracticesof the cables selected. The cables should be strain relieved to prevent anyforce from being exerted on the connectors. See also section “Cable routing” atthe beginning ofthis chapter.

Figure 4-38 EPL4_E14 cable connection

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingEPL4_E14 option card

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-50 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 167: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

EPL4_E132_75 option card

Interfaces

The EPL4_E132_75 option card provide the following interfaces:

• Four RJ45 connectors for dual rate Ethernet (10/100Base-T)

• Sixteen RJ45 connectors to cover 32 E1 interfaces with 75Ω/120Ω (2 × E1 perRJ45).

• 10/100/1000Base-T for ports 35 and 36

Cable data (10/100Base-T)

The Ethernet LAN cable specification is given in section“X8PL and X4IP-V2 optioncards” (p. 4-46).

Cable data (E1)

The E1 cable specification is given in section“PI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75 optioncards” (p. 4-35).

Cable connection

Please connect the cables as shown in the figure below.

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingEPL4_E132_75 option card

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-51

Page 168: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Note: The routing of the cables should be in accordance with the recommendedpracticesof the cables selected. The cables should be strain relieved to prevent anyforce from being exerted on the connectors. See also section “Cable routing” atthe beginning ofthis chapter.

Figure 4-39 EPL4_E132_75 cable connection

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingEPL4_E132_75 option card

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-52 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 169: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

ESW4_E14 option card

Interfaces

The ESW4_E14 option card provides the following interfaces:

• Two cages for Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) optical transceivers whichsupport 1000Base-X

• Two RJ45 connectors for triple rate Ethernet (10/100/1000Base-T)

• Two RJ45 connectors for dual rate Ethernet (10/100Base-T)

• Two RJ45 connectors for four E1 interfaces with 75/120Ω (Selection can be madeon port level via the user interface or on circuit pack level; default: 120Ω).

Cable data (10/100/1000Base-T)

The Ethernet LAN cable specification is given in section“X8PL and X4IP-V2 optioncards” (p. 4-46).

Cable data (E1)

The E1 cable specification is given in section“PI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75 optioncards” (p. 4-35).

Cable connection

Please connect the cables as shown in section“EPL4_E14 option card” (p. 4-49).

NOTE: The routing of the cables should be in accordance with the recommendedpractices of the cables selected. The cables should be strain relieved to prevent anyforce from being exerted on the connectors. See also section “Cable routing” at thebeginning of this chapter.

EOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 option cards

Interfaces

The EOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 option cards provide the following interfaces:

• Two RJ45 connectors for triple rate Ethernet (10/100/1000BASE-T(X))

• Two RJ45 connectors for dual rate Ethernet (10/100BASE-T(X))

• Sixteen RJ45 connectors to cover 32 E1 interfaces with 75Ω/120Ω (2 × E1 perRJ45).

Cable data (10/100Base-T/1000Base-T(X))

The Ethernet LAN cable specification is given in section“X8PL and X4IP-V2 optioncards” (p. 4-46).

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingESW4_E14 option card

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-53

Page 170: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Cable data (E1)

The E1 cable specification is given in section“PI-E1/63 and PI-E1/63_75 optioncards” (p. 4-35).

Cable connection

Please connect the cables as shown in the figure below:

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingEOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 option cards

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-54 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 171: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingEOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 option cards

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-55

Page 172: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Note: The routing of the cables should be in accordance with the recommendedpractices of the cables selected. The cables should be strain relieved to prevent anyforce from being exerted on the connectors. See also section “Cable routing ” atthe beginning of this chapter.

SI-14/8 option card

Interfaces

The SI-14/8 option card provides the following interfaces:

• Two cages for Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) optical transceivers whichsupport STM-1 and STM-4 SFPs

• Six cages for Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) optical transceivers whichsupport STM-1 SFPs

Cable data (STM-1/STM-4)

The optical fiber cable specification is given in section“Fiber cables” (p. 4-61).

Cable connection

Please connect the cables as shown in section“Fiber cables” (p. 4-61)

Note: The routing of the cables should be in accordance with the recommendedpractices of the cables selected. The cables should be strain relieved to prevent anyforce from being exerted on the connectors. See also section “Cable routing ” atthe beginning of this chapter.

System cabling Tributary and option card cablingEOP4_E132 and EOP4_E132_75 option cards

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-56 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 173: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

SFP cabling

Overview

Purpose

This section provides information on cabling SFPs.

Contents

SFP-155E cable 4-57

Optical interfaces 4-58

Fiber cables 4-61

SFP-155E cable

Purpose

The SFP-155E cable is used for connecting the 155 mbit/s STM-1 electrical inputs andoutputs tothe 1655 AMU NE.

Cable data (75 Ω, coaxial)

Table 4-30 Components (STM-1e cable)

Component Part Number

1.0/2.3 straight crimpplug, push pull

ITT Canon: D55-F24-3035GDA

ITT Canon: D55-F24-3080GDA

1.0/2.3 75 ohm coax Belden: BT3002 (H133T03) Nexans: NCX1

Cables available for order (75 Ω)

The following pre-configured cables can be ordered:

• STM-1e coaxcable5 m — CC408939205

• STM-1e coax cable 10 m — CC408939213

Figure 4-40 Cable design (STM-1e cable)

System cabling SFP cablingOverview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-57

Page 174: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

• STM-1e coax cable 15 m — CC408939221

• STM-1e coax cable 20 m — CC408939239

Optical interfaces

Overview

The main card, MI-16/4, supportstwo hot-pluggablemultirate (STM-1/STM-4) andtwo hot-pluggablemultirate (STM-4/STM-16) interfaces. The main card, MI-14/4,supportstwo hot-pluggablemultirate (STM-1/STM-4) andtwo single rate (STM-1)interfaces. The multirate interfaces can be provisioned as STM-1, STM-4 or STM-16ports via a management system.

Optical connectors

The optical line interfaces can be equipped with various SFPs (Small Form-FactorPluggable Optics). All optical SFPs are equipped with 45° rotatable LC connectors.The figure below shows the variable SFP module system.

NOTES:

• Please note that Nokia warranty is contingent upon the use of Nokia specified SFPs for 1655 AMU. Use of other SFPs is not approved by Nokia and is fully at the customer’s own risk. Any warrantyobligation of Nokia is extinguished when non-Lucent specified SFPs areused.

• It is not mandatory to have an LBO (Lightguide Build-Out) between the SFP andthe connected optical cable. However, in the case of measurements with opticalloops and/or connecting power meters an LBO (15 dB) can be required. An LBOcan also be necessary to ensure the correct input power (see chapter 8, section“Optical received power test” (p. 8-2)).

Figure 4-41 Optical SFP module

System cabling SFP cablingSFP-155E cable

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-58 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 175: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Specifications

The following optical SFPs are available:

• STM-1, S1.1 (CC: 109469809), short haul, 1310 nm, 15 km

• STM-1, L1.1 (CC: 109469825), long haul, 1310 nm, 40 km

• STM-1, L1.2 (CC: 109469817), long haul, 1550 nm, 80 km

• STM-1, 155E (CC: 109543561), electrical

• STM-1/STM-4, SWF 1-1, (CC: 109559500), 1480/1500 nm, single fiberbidirectional

• STM-1/STM-4, SWF 1-2, (CC: 109559492), 1490/1310 nm, single fiberbidirectional

• STM-4, S4.1 (CC: 109509687), short haul, 1310 nm, 15 km

• STM-4, L4.1 (CC: 109509695), long haul, 1310 nm, 40 km

• STM-4, L4.2 (CC: 109509703), long haul, 1550 nm, 80 km

• STM-16, I16.1 (CC: 109509711), 1310 nm, 2 km

• STM-16, S16.1 (CC: 109509729), short haul, 1310 nm, 15 km

• STM-16, L16.1 (CC: 109509737), long haul, 1310 nm, 40 km

• STM-16, L16.2 (CC: 109509745), long haul, 1550 nm, 80 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 SH1 (CC: 109620385), short haul, 40 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 SH2 (CC: 109620393), short haul, 40 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 SH3 (CC: 109620401), short haul, 40 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 SH4 (CC: 109620419), short haul, 40 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 SH5 (CC: 109620427), short haul, 40 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 SH6 (CC: 109620435), short haul, 40 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 SH7 (CC: 109620443), short haul, 40 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 SH8 (CC: 109620450), short haul, 40 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 LH1 (CC: 109620468), long haul, 80 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 LH2 (CC: 109620476), long haul, 80 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 LH3 (CC: 109620484), long haul, 80 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 LH4 (CC: 109620492), long haul, 80 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 LH5 (CC: 109620500), long haul, 80 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 LH6 (CC: 109620518), long haul, 80 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 LH7 (CC: 109620526), long haul, 80 km

• STM-4/STM-16, CWDM4/16 LH8 (CC: 109620534), long haul, 80 km

• GE SX (CC: 109526483), 850 nm, multi-mode 550 m

• GE LX (CC: 109526491), 1310 nm, single-mode 5–10 km

• GE ZX (CC: 109534347), 1550 nm, single-mode 80 km.

• FE 100BASE-LX (CC: 109643759), single mode, 1310nm

• GE (CC: 109606657), single fiber working, 1310nm (upstream)

• GE (CC: 109606665), single fiber working, 1490nm (downstream)

System cabling SFP cablingOptical interfaces

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-59

Page 176: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

The characteristics of the SFPs are summarized in the table below.

Table 4-31 SFP characteristics

S1.1 L1.1 L1.2 S4.1 L4.1 L4.2

Transmitter

Wavelength 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm

Maximumoutputpower

–8...–15dBm

+0...–5 dBm +0...–5 dBm –8...–15dBm

+2...–3 dBm +2...–3 dBm

Eye maskpattern

see G.957 see G.957 see G.957 see G.957 see G.957 see G.957

FDAclass/IEChazard level

Class I/1 Class I/1 Class I/1 Class I/1 Class I/1 Class I/1

Maximumdispersion

185 ps/nm 246 ps/nm notapplicable

74 ps/nm notapplicable

notapplicable

Attenuationrange

0...12 dB 10...28 dB 10...28 dB 0...12 dB 10...24 dB 10...24 dB

Optical pathpenalty

< 1 dB < 1 dB < 1 dB < 1 dB < 1 dB < 1 dB

Receiver

Sensitivity –28 dBm –34 dBm –34 dBm –28 dBm –28 dBm –28 dBm

Overload –8 dBm –10 dBm –10 dBm –8 dBm –8 dBm –8 dBm

Connector/Fiber type

Connectortype

LC LC LC LC LC LC

Fiber typecore/claddingdiameter(µm)

SM (9/125) SM (9/125) SM (9/125) SM (9/125) SM (9/125) SM (9/125)

The optical specifications for GE SX and GE LX are according to IEEE Std802.3-2002®.

System cabling SFP cablingOptical interfaces

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-60 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 177: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Fiber cables

Cable data

Multi-mode fibers (62/125) or Single-mode fibers (9/125) according to G.652 must beused. The cordagediameter must be 1.6 mm or 2.0 mm.

Cordage construction: Low Smoke, Zero Halogen (LSZH).

Table 4-32 Components (Fiber cables)

Component Part Number

Customer dependent connector on ODF:

SC, LC, FC, ST, E2000, VFO, EC, DIN

– –

Optical single mode LC-PC jumper connectorwith 45° angled, 360° rotatable, bend protectionboot on equipment

Lucent: 848597605 FCI: 98615

Simplex single mode fiber cordage Belden: 46990-3309-240 –

Simplex multi-mode fiber cordage Belden: 46996-3322-240 –

Cable connectors

45° rotatable LC connectors must be used at the AMU side. At the ODF side one ofthe connectorsshownin the figure below (customer dependent).

Cable connection

Please connect the fiber cables as shown in the figure below.

Figure 4-42 Optical connector types

FC L C

E 2000 L C 45O boot, r otable

VFO S C

AMU side

System cabling SFP cablingFiber cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

4-61

Page 178: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Note: The routing of the fibers should be in accordance with the specifications forthe selectedfiber. Care should be taken not to exceed the bending radius of about30 mm when placing the fibers. Exceeding the recommended radius may causedistortion and poor signal quality. All fibers should be strain relieved to prevent anyforce from being exerted on the connectors. See also section “Cable routing ” atthe beginningof this chapter.

Clean all connections, as required, before attaching (see Appendix A,“Fibercleaning” (p. A-7)).

Figure 4-43 Fiber cable connection

System cabling SFP cablingFiber cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4-62 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 179: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

5 5Powering

Overview

Purpose

This chapter describes the powering of the 1655 AMU system and some final testswhich shouldbe performed to end the physical installation part.

Contents

Physical installation check 5-2

Physical installation 5-2

Cable connections 5-3

Power initialization 5-4

Switching on and testing supply voltage 5-5

Physical and power installation exit checklist 5-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

5-1

Page 180: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Physical installation check

Overview

Purpose

A complete physical installation check should be done to ensure that all componentsarecompleteandthe cables are connected correctly.

Checks

The following should be checked:

• Physical installation

• Cable connections.

The tests mentioned above are described in more detail in the following.

Contents

Physical installation 5-2

Cable connections 5-3

Physical installation

Overview

This test checks whether the physical installation is correct.

Checks

Check that

• there are no visible defects

• the mechanical parts are secured

• the optical couplings (or SFPs) are affixed to the optical interfaces.

Powering Physical installation checkOverview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-2 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 181: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Cable connections

Overview

This test checks the correct cable installation. Which cables are needed depends on theused cards and external equipment.

Checks

Check that the following cables are connected:

• Grounding cables

• MDIO cables (optional)

• EOW cables (optional)

• Station clock cables (optional)

• Q-LAN/G-LAN cables (optional)

• CIT cables (optional)

• USB cables (optional)

• E1 cables (optional)

• E3 cables (optional)

• DS1 cables (optional)

• DS3 cables (optional)

• LAN cables (optional)

• Fiber cables (optional).

Powering Physical installation checkCable connections

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

5-3

Page 182: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Power initialization

Overview

Purpose

This section describes all steps which are necessary for the power initialization.

Pre-cautions

DANGER

Laser hazard

1655AMU systemsoperate with invisible laser radiation. Laser radiation can causeconsiderable injuries to the eyes.

Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or into an open optical connector as longas the optical source is switched on. Always observe the laser warning instructions (cf.“Laser safety” (p. 1-8)).

DANGER

Injury to eyes caused by invisible laser radiation.

Arcing can cause burns to the hands and damage to the eyes.

Ensure that the power is switched to “OFF” before removing or inserting the powersupply plug.

Contents

Switching on and testing supply voltage 5-5

Physical and power installation exit checklist 5-6

Powering Power initializationOverview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-4 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 183: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Switching on and testing supply voltage

Overview

This section describes the procedure for powering the system. Please observe the orderof steps described below.

Because each of the 4 power interfaces (if two main cards are available) can be usedfor powering, the test described below must be performed for each interface.

The power cables consist of 3 wires with a diameter of maximum 1.5 mm2. In thatcase 4A rack fuses must be used.

Procedure

Proceed as follows to switch on and test the power supply:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Check the voltage at the external Battery Distribution and Fuse Bay (BDFB) or at thePower Distribution Panel (if available) and enter the measured value in the result table(see chapter 9,“Power supply measurements” (p. 9-1)).

Result: The voltage must be in the following range: –39 VDC ... – 72 VDC.

Note: Do not proceed if the voltage is outside the range.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Switch off the power.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Connect one power cable between the BATT 1 interface of the 1655 AMU (main card)and the BDFB (or PDP).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Switch on the power.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Check that the red “FAIL” LED of the connected main card is illuminating.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 RepeatStep 2to Step 5with BATT 2 of the same main card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 If a second main card is available, repeatStep 2to Step 6for this card.

Powering Power initializationSwitching on and testing supply voltage

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

5-5

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 184: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Power failure

If the powering procedure described above was unsuccessful, please refer to AppendixA, section“Power failure” (p. A-2).

Physical and power installation exit checklist

Checklist

Verify that all procedures described below has been completed. If a procedure was notapplicable, indicate“N/A”.

Procedure Result(Passed, Failed, N/A)

Initials Notes

Subrack mounting

Card mounting

Fan unit mounting

Power cabling

Ground cabling

MDIO cabling

Station clock cabling

Q-LAN/G-LAN cabling

ITM-CIT cabling

EOW cabling

USB cabling

E1 cabling

E3 cabling

DS1 cabling

DS3 cabling

LAN cabling

Fiber cabling

Physical installation check

Powering

Powering Power initializationSwitching on and testing supply voltage

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5-6 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 185: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Part II: NE provisioning andstand alone installationtest

Overview

Purpose

This part of the 1655 AMU Installation Guide contains the ITM-CIT and NE softwareinstallation, theNE provisioning, and the stand-alone test procedures.

Contents

This part of the document contains the following chapters:

• Chapter 6,ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning

• Chapter 7,Stand-alone test procedures.

Entry checklist

The following provides a checklist to be completed prior to performing the ITM-CITinstallation, NEprovisioningand stand alone installation tests. Verify that eachprocedure has been completed. Check off and initial the item.

Procedure Completed Initials Notes

Have all procedures been completed which arerequired in Chapter 5,“Physical and powerinstallation exit checklist” (p. 5-6))?

Is the ITM-CIT and NE software available?

Is a laptop or desktop PC available meetingthe minimum requirements (see section“Requirements” (p. 2-19))?

Is a crossed LAN cable CAT5 with 4-wireRJ45/RJ45 connectors available?

Is the required test equipment available?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

II-1

Page 186: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Contents

Chapter 6, ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning 6-1

Chapter 7, Stand alone test procedures 7-1

NE provisioning and stand alone installation test Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

II-2 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 187: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

6 6ITM-CIT installation andNE provisioning

Overview

Purpose

This chapterdescribes the ITM-CIT and NE software installation and the initial NEprovisioning viaITM-CIT.

Assumption

The person setting up the system should be familiar with 1655 AMU, the SDHfunctionality and ITM-CIT.

Contents

Software installation 6-2

Installing ITM-CIT 6-3

Installing the fast download application 6-6

Fast NE software download 6-7

Connecting the ITM-CIT to the NE 6-9

NE login procedure 6-11

Provisioning system parameters 6-13

NE date and time 6-14

Node creation 6-16

Slot provisioning 6-19

Confirm/Update the MIB 6-21

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

6-1

Page 188: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Software installation

Overview

Purpose

This section describes the ITM-CIT and NE software installation and how to performan NE login.

Contents

Installing ITM-CIT 6-3

Installing the fast download application 6-6

Fast NE software download 6-7

Connecting the ITM-CIT to the NE 6-9

NE login procedure 6-11

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Software installationOverview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-2 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 189: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Installing ITM-CIT

Purpose

Use this procedure to install the ITM-CIT software onto a new system.

NOTE: Please note that this installation procedure is only valid for the currentITM-CIT release. This procedure might change in future releases of ITM-CIT eventhough there is no update of the NE software.

Required equipment

For the ITM-CIT a personal computer is necessary which fulfils the followingminimum requirements:

• Pentium® processor with 450 MHz or higher

• 128 MB RAM or higher

• Keyboard

• Mouse

• 300 MB of free hard-disk drive space

• CD-ROM drive

• Display with 1024x768, 16 million colors recommended

• RS-232 communication port (serial asynchronous port)

• Microsoft® Windows® 2000,Windows XP® orWindows Vista®operating system.

• ITM-CIT connector (F-interface) cable (one end RS-232 and the other end RJ45modular jack).

The performance can be enhanced by using a higher performance personal computer.Independent of the requirements listed above the minimum requirements of theoperating system must be fulfilled. A CD-ROM containing the ITM-CIT software mustbe available.

Before you begin

Before installing the software, the software release number must be known.

The installation program cannot install system files or update shared files if they are inuse by other programs. For this reason, the user must stop as many Windowsapplications as possible before starting with the installation procedures.

Installation procedure

Complete the following steps to install the ITM-CIT software on your PC:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 On theWindows® desktop, click with the left button of the mouse onStart.

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Software installationInstalling ITM-CIT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

6-3

Page 190: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Result: The Start menu appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click with the left button of the mouse on theRun item.

Result: The Run window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click on theBrowse button.

Result: The Browse window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Insert the CD-ROM containing the ITM-CIT application into the CD-ROM drive andclick with the left button of the mouse on the CD-ROM item.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select the required directory and click on the executable fileSETUP.exe and then clickOpen.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click OK to run the executable file on the CD-ROM.

Result: The InstallShield Wizard window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Next to continue with the installation of the ITM-CIT software.

Result: The ITM-CIT files are extracted. This will take a few minutes. Then theWelcome window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click Next.

Result: The Software License Agreement window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 If you agree clickYes.

Result: The Select Language window appears. Here the language of the OnlineHelp is defined.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 If then

you want to install ITM-CIT withdefault settingEnglish (EnglishOnline Help)

click Next.

Result: The Select Components window appears.

you want to install a differentlanguage

run SETUP.exe again and select the requiredlanguage (right now in english available only).

Result: The Select Components window appears.

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Software installationInstalling ITM-CIT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-4 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 191: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Select the component(s) you wish to be installed. It is recommended to leave thedefault setting and install the ITM-CIT including the Online Help files.

Important!A component MIB upload/download tool may be part of the installablecomponent list. This tool is not supported by 1655 AMU, but may be installed for usewith other products supported by ITM-CIT.

Click Next to install the ITM-CIT software in the default directory (C:\..\ITM-CIT) orclick on theBrowse button to select or create a different directory for the ITM-CITsoftware.

Additionally you can check the available disk space for all available drives by clickingon Disk Space... . Leave the windowAvailable Disk Space by clicking OK orCancel.

Important! Activating Disk Space... may change the default directory to anotherdrive.

Result: The Provide password window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 It is optional to define a password. Fill in a password, if required and confirm it. Then,click Next.

Result: The Select Program Folder window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Leave the default setting, select or create a folder in which the program icons will beinstalled. ClickNext.

Result: The ITM-CIT is installed. This will take a few minutes. Then theRestarting Windows window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Choose one of the given options and clickOK to finish the setup.

Important! It is recommended to reboot the PC before starting up the ITM-CIT,but make sure to restart the computer only if otherWindows® programs have beenclosed before.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Software installationInstalling ITM-CIT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

6-5

Page 192: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Installing the fast download application

Overview

The “Fast download” application permits to download the current software in theequipment in about five minutes. The “Fast download” is realized from a PC connectedto the G-LAN interface of the 1655 AMU.

The “Fast download” application is installed in the Windows environment using theprogram supplied. It is a simple process during which on-screen guidance is provided.

Note: Always use theFast Download Toolthat has been delivered with thesystem.

Procedure

Proceed as follows to install the “Fast download” application:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Insert the CD-ROM which includes the “Fastdownload.exe” file in the CD-ROM driveof the PC.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select theRun... command from the WindowsStart menu, typed:\fastdownload.exe(whered: is the CD-ROM drive indicator) and clickOK.

Result: The screen of theWinZip Self-Extractor – FastDownload.exeis displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the directory to which the files shall be extracted and press theUnzip button.

Result: The files will be extracted.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select theRun... command from the WindowsStart menu, typeC:\TEMP\setup.exe(whereC:\TEMP is the used directory) and clickOK.

Result: The Fastdownload Installer dialog boxappears. Follow the instructions andaccept the license agreement.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Install successively as requested the “Fast Download Tool” and “WinPcap”. When theinstallation is complete, a message appears indicating that the installation has beensuccessful.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Reboot the PC to allow for the tool to connect to the present Ethernet Adapters.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Software installationInstalling the fast download application

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-6 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 193: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Fast NE software download

Before you begin

Ensure that the assumptions listed below are fulfilled before carrying out the fastsoftware download:

• The 1655AMU unit is powered on.

• The “Fast download” application is installed on the PC.

• An Ethernet cable is installed between the Ethernet access of the PC and theG-LAN interface (RJ45 connector) of the NE. Acrossed cable must be used.NOTE: This connectioncanalso be realized through a HUB. In that casestraightcables must be used between the PC and the HUB and between the HUB and theNE.

Figure 6-1 Cable connection for fast NE software download

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Software installationFast NE software download

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

6-7

Page 194: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Procedure

Proceed as follows to install the NE software via the “Fast download” application:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 SelectStart → Programs → Fast download tool.

Result: The screenFast Download Toolis displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the correct Ethernet Adapter.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the load with the extension.ISD or .S3 to be downloaded for the 1655AMUunit.

If a “.S3” file is selected for download, then the tool will do a conversion to “.ISD”.Click OK to the displayed “Attention” message.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select theNE Node Name of the Network Element you want to download to.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click on theDownload button to start the software download to the NE.

Result: The download starts and the progress of the download is indicated by thefollowing messages:

Connecting, Erasing, andDownloading

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Whenthe download is completed successfully, a pop up window appears with thequestion whether to activate the new isd.

Click on Yes to activate the downloaded software.

Click on No to keep the downloaded software in the backup store. If you select No,the software can be activated later through a management system

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 When Yes is chosen in Step 6 , the user can select one of the following options:

1. Erase the MIB and commit the new ISD..

2. Erase the MIB but not commit the new ISD.

3. Not erase the MIB but commit the new ISD.

4. Not erase the MIB and not commit the new ISD.

Note: When the user is logged in to the Network Element with ITM-CIT managementsystem, then the default optionNot erase the MIB but commit the new ISD isselected automatically.

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Software installationFast NE software download

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-8 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 195: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click on Exit.

Important! Reboot the PC after downloading the NE software using the FastDownload Tool, and before connecting the ITM-CIT to the NE.

Software download failure

If the “Fast download” application doesn’t work or in case of a software downloadfailure (red “Fail” LED is illuminating), perform an NE software download asdescribed in Appendix A, section“Installing the NE software” (p. A-3).

Connecting the ITM-CIT to the NE

Overview

To perform software tests and provision the system with local configurationparameters, an Integrated Transport Management – Craft Interface Terminal (ITM-CIT)must be connected to the 1655 AMU locally.

Connecting the ITM-CIT

Connect the ITM-CIT to the 1655 AMU as shown in the figure below.

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Software installationFast NE software download

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

6-9

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 196: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure 6-2 ITM-CIT cable connection

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Software installationConnecting the ITM-CIT to the NE

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-10 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 197: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

NE login procedure

Overview

This section describes the login procedure to an NE.

Before you begin

Before starting the application, ITM-CIT and login to an NE, make sure that

• the PC is connected to the NE (see section“Connecting the ITM-CIT to the NE”(p. 6-9))

• the PC is rebooted at least once after software installation.

Initial login procedure

Complete the following steps to login to an NE:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Start the ITM-CIT application.

Result: The main ITM-CIT window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select File → NE Login → Login in the main menu.

Result: The NE Loginwindow appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the correctCOM port.Usually this is COM1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 SelectEdit to set the correct baudrate.

1655 AMU does operate on a baudrate of 115k.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 SelectLogin.

Result: The Password Requiredwindow appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Select the user role from the capability field.

Selectable user roles are:

• Admin (for ITM-CIT administration and configuration of an NE)

• Config (to configure an NE)

• View (only to view NE configuration).

Fill in the required password (if configured) and clickOK.

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Software installationNE login procedure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

6-11

Page 198: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Result: The ITM-CIT is logged into the NE.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Software installationNE login procedure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-12 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 199: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Provisioning system parameters

Overview

Purpose

This section describes the provisioning tasks which should be performed to prepare thesystemfor operationand to be able to perform the required tests.

Related information

An overview about the ITM-CIT tasks related to 1655 AMU is given in the “1655AMU User OperationsGuide”.

Contents

NE date and time 6-14

Node creation 6-16

Slot provisioning 6-19

Confirm/Update the MIB 6-21

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Provisioning system parametersOverview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

6-13

Page 200: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

NE date and time

Overview

This sectionprovides a procedure for setting or changing the NE date and time.

Before you begin

The current date and time information must be known. If there is an association withthe LucentOMS, then the date and time are automatically set when the association isestablished and will be repeated every 24 hours (at night).

Procedure

Complete the following steps to set the NE date and time:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Management → Time in the main menu.

Result: The NE Date and Timewindow appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Edit.

Result: The Edit Date and Timewindow appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Selectthe desiredEdit Mode. Fill in the date and time (when the manual setting ischosen) and clickOK.

Result: The Edit Date and Timewindow disappears.

Parameters

Date

This field is used to set the date when the manual setting edit mode is chosen.

Edit mode

There are two edit modes which provide a choice of methods by which the date andtime canbe changed. The possible values are described in the table below.

Edit mode Description

Sync to CIT time The date and time are set automatically by using the local timeand date from the CIT (PC). This information is sent to the NEand the time and date are set.

Manual set The date and time must be set manually.

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Provisioning system parametersNE date and time

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-14 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 201: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Time

This field is used to set the time when the manual setting edit mode is chosen.

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Provisioning system parametersNE date and time

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

6-15

Page 202: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Node creation

Overview

Creating a node provides the basic information necessary to place an NE into service.

Before you begin

Before starting to create a node, determine the following:

• the name, the address, and the location of the node are known.

• the location and the type of cards physically present in the NE are known.

• the main card must be assigned before the interfaces associated with this card canbe assigned. For example, a tributary card must be assigned before the ports forthis card can be assigned.NOTE:Any mistake in provisioning the slots will result in a failure whenattempting to create the node. When a mistake has been made, after clickingFinish, the error message “Slot configuration conflict” appears. The node creationhasfailed, and the entire node creation process must be repeated.

• To create an association with the Lucent OMS, the NE cannot be in an isolatedstate (as a default condition, each NE arrives from the factory in an isolated state).To view if the NE is in the isolated state, selectManagement→ Overlay CommsNetwork→ DCN. If the NE is in the isolated state, clickEdit. The windowEditProvisioned DCN Informationthen appears. In this window, change (or reselect)any of the displayed parameters and clickOK. Doing so will remove the NE fromthe isolation state and an association with the OMS will now be possible. Adetailed procedure on provisioning DCN information for the 1655 AMU is givenunder the section, “Configuring a Data Communication Network (DCN)” in the“1655 AMU User Operations Guide”

Procedure

Complete the following steps to create an NE:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 SelectManagement → Node Creation.

Result: The Node Creation – Parameterswindow appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter theNE Name andNE Location.

Result: The NE name and location appear, respectively, in the fieldsNE NameandNE Location.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Next.

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Provisioning system parametersNode creation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-16 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 203: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Result: The windowNode Creation– Provisioned Slotsappears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Complete the procedure“Slot provisioning” (p. 6-19).

Result: The slots of the NE are properly assigned.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Complete the procedure“Confirm/Update the MIB” (p. 6-21).

Result: The MIB is now confirmed, and after re-establishing the connectionbetween theNE and the ITM-CIT, the MIB status in the windowNode Detailsshould beFilled.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Close.

Parameters

NE name

The NE’s name is listed. The name must be unique across management domains. If theNE is notmanaged by the ITM-NM, then the name may be up to 20 characters inlength. If the NE will be managed by the ITM-NM, then the name must be 3 to 10characters long with the last three characters a slash and two digits. OnlyA-Z, 0-9, _, /,and - are permitted for NEs managed by the ITM-NM. An example of an ITM-NMcompatible name is “LONDON/02”.

NE location

The location of the NE is given. The location may have up to 20 uppercase orlowercase characters,digits, and spaces.

Slot

The slot position is given here.

Assigned card

The type of card provisioned in the listed slot is shown.

State

Displays the status of the listed slot. The different slot states are described in the tablebelow.

Slot state Description

Assigned Slot is assigned

Unassigned Slot is unassigned

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Provisioning system parametersNode creation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

6-17

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 204: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Slot state Description

Auto Slot is provisioned but waiting for card. Once the provisionedcard is present, the slot state will automatically change toAssigned.

Operation

When assigning cards, an operation must be chosen. The choices are described in thetable below.

Operation Description

Assigned Assigns the card to the slot.

Unassigned The slot is configured to be empty. The NE will not expect anycard to be present in this slot.

Auto Automatically assigns the card to the slot once the NEestablishes the presence of a card of the correct type. Until thistime, the slot acts asUnassigned.

Main card

The card provisioned or to be provisioned in the selected slot.

MIB state

The status of the MIB is indicated. The possible values are described in the tablebelow.

MIB state Description

Empty An empty System Controller (SC) has been inserted or the MIBwas cleared after starting an automatic MIB download by themanagement system. If the MIB state is empty, the managementsystem can proceed with the MIB download.

Filled The NE possesses a valid MIB which has been confirmed.

Filled Unknown The NE has a MIB, however, it is of unknown validity. Thiscan occur, for instance, if one SC is replaced by another SChaving a MIB.

Filled NotConfirmed

The NE has a MIB, however, it has not yet been confirmed bythe ITM-CIT. The procedure“Confirm/Update the MIB”(p. 6-21) gives the steps necessary to confirm the MIB. Onceconfirmed the state will becomeFilled.

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Provisioning system parametersNode creation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-18 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 205: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Slot provisioning

Before you begin

Before provisioning the slots, keep in mind the following points:

• Before provisioning the NE slot configuration, it is assumed that the newconfiguration of the NE is known. This includes the exact types of cards to beprovisioned and the corresponding slot positions for these cards.

• The card in slot MAIN-1 must be assigned before its corresponding interfaces areassigned.

• When creating a node using a“Street cabinet version” (p. 2-4)a FAN must beassigned in the FAN slot before in order to identify a street cabinet

Procedure

Proceed as follows to provision the slots of an NE (this includes both assigning andunassigning of cards):

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 SelectProvisioning → Equipment → Provisioned NE Components.

Result: The Provisioned NE Componentswindow appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the respective slot from the list in the window, and clickAssign/Unassign.

Result: The Assign NE Cards to Slotwindow appears with information concerningthe selected slot and its associated slots.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the desired operation from the selections at the top of the window.

Result: The correct operation is selected.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If assigning cards, use the pull-down menu forMain Card and select the correct cardcorresponding to the displayed slot.

Result: The correct card appears as the newMain Card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click OK.

Important! When assigning cards during node creation, instead of theProvisionedNE Componentswindow, the windowNode Creation - Provision Slotswillreappear.

Result: The desired operation for this slot is performed, and the windowProvisioned NE Componentsappears again.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 If creating a node, then clickFinish. Otherwise, clickClose.

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Provisioning system parametersSlot provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

6-19

Page 206: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Result: The window Provisioned NEComponents(or in the case of node creation,Node Creation - Provision Slots) disappears.

Parameters

Slot

The slot position is given here.

Expected card

The card type provisioned in the listed slot is shown.

Slot state

Displays the status of the listed slot. The different slot states are described in the tablebelow.

Slot state Description

Assigned Slot is assigned

Unassigned Slot is unassigned

Auto Slot is provisioned but waiting for card. Once the provisionedcard is present, the slot state will automatically change toAssigned.

Operation

When assigning cards, an operation must be chosen. The choices are described in thetablebelow.

Operation Description

Assigned Assigns the card to the slot.

Unassigned The slot is configured to be empty. The NE will not expect anycard to be present in this slot.

Auto Automatically assigns the card to the slot once the NEestablishes the presence of a card of the correct type. Until thistime, the slot acts asUnassigned.

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Provisioning system parametersSlot provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-20 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 207: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Confirm/Update the MIB

Overview

A MIB confirmation should be performed during node creation or in any othersituation where the MIB status is “Filled, not confirmed”.

Before you begin

Before confirming or updating the MIB, keep in mind the following points:

• Performing a MIB confirmation will cause the NE to reset. A new login, afterwaiting several minutes for the reset to take place, will have to be performed.

• Confirming the MIB for an existing NE can result in traffic disruptions.

• To create an association with the Lucent OMS, the NE cannot be in an isolatedstate (as a default condition, each NE arrives from the factory in an isolated state).To view if the NE is in the isolated state, selectManagement→ Overlay CommsNetwork→ DCN. If the NE is in the isolated state, clickEdit. The windowEditProvisioned DCN Informationthen appears. In this window, change (or reselect)any of the displayed parameters and clickOK. Doing so will remove the NE fromthe isolated state and an association with the OMS will now be possible. A detailedprocedure on provisioning DCN information for the 1655 AMU is given under thesection, “Configuring a Data Communication Network (DCN)” in the “1655 AMUUser Operations Guide”

Procedure

Proceed as follows to confirm the MIB of a NE:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 SelectManagement → Node Details.

Result: The Node Detailswindow appears. This window allows confirmation orupdate of a NE MIB.

CAUTION: Confirming the MIB will result in an NE reset. The current loginsession will be terminated. Also, while overwriting the older MIB, traffic can beaffected.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Confirm MIB.

Result: A confirmation window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Yes.

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Provisioning system parametersConfirm/Update the MIB

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

6-21

Page 208: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Result: The operationwill be started. Confirming the MIB should take severalminutes. During thistime, the connection between the ITM-CIT and the NE will belost. To re-establish this connection, a login must once again be performed afterwaiting for the operation to complete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Login again.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 SelectManagement → Node Details.

Result: The NodeDetails window appears.In this window, the MIB state can beviewed. It should now beFilled.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Close.

Result: The Node Detailswindow disappears.

Parameters

NE type

The NEtype is indicated.

NE name

The NE’s name is listed. The name must be unique across management domains. If theNE is not managed by the ITM-NM, then the name may be up to 20 characters inlength. If the NE will be managed by the ITM-NM, then the name must be 3 to 10characters long with the last three characters a slash and two digits. OnlyA-Z, 0-9, _, /,and - are permitted for NEs managed by the ITM-NM. An example of an ITM-NMcompatible name is “LONDON/02”.

NE location

The location of the NE is given. The location may have up to 20 uppercase orlowercasecharacters,digits, and spaces.

MIB state

The status of the MIB is indicated. The possible values are described in the tablebelow.

MIB state Description

Empty An empty System Controller (SC) has been inserted or the MIBwas cleared after starting an MIB download by the managementsystem automatically. If the MIB state is empty, themanagement system can proceed with the MIB download.

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Provisioning system parametersConfirm/Update the MIB

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-22 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 209: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

MIB state Description

Fil led The NE possesses a valid MIB which has been confirmed.

Filled Unknown The NE has a MIB, however, it is of unknown validity. Thiscan occur, for instance, if one SC is replaced by another SChaving a MIB.

Filled NotConfirmed

The NE has a MIB, however, it has not yet been confirmed bythe ITM-CIT or Lucent OMS. The procedure“Confirm/Updatethe MIB” (p. 6-21) gives the steps necessary to confirm theMIB . Once confirmed the state will becomeFilled.

Waiting for Upload This state is only possible when the NE is managed by theLucent OMS. After confirmation of the MIB, the NE performs areset and loses its association with the OMS. When the NErestarts, the MIB state becomesWaiting for Upload. When theOMS connects to the NE and detects this MIB state, a MIBupload is performed, and the state will then becomeFilled.

Management state

The state of the association with the Lucent OMS is displayed. The possible states aredescribed inthe table below.

Management state Description

Normal Normal will be displayed whenever the automated managementoperations have been completed. In other words, the OMS hascompleted the MIB upload, MIB download, MIBresynchronization, or reevaluation of fault status. The state canalso beNormal when the association between theITM-CIT/Lucent OMS and the NE has been lost.

Uploading The OMS is performing an MIB upload.

Resyncing If the MIB of the NE and the MIB image on the OMS are outof synchronization, then the OMS invokes a resynchronization.The management state shows the progress of this operation. Ifexecuted properly, it should display, in order:Normal,Resyncing, Normal, ReEvaluatingFaultStatus, Normal.

ReEvaluatingFaultStatus

After a resynchronization, the OMS initiates a reevaluate faultstatus operation.

Downloading A MIB download has been started by the OMS. Themanagement state is set toNormal during the downloadingprocess. If the MIB download is in progress when a loss ofassociation occurs, then the management state will remainDownloading.

EMS connection state

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Provisioning system parametersConfirm/Update the MIB

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

6-23

Page 210: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Indicates whether an active connection (CMISE association) exist to the elementmanager (Lucent OMS).

MIB provisioning for the main card with factory default settings

• Provision the DCN and the DCC information in the ITM-CIT for the new unit. Adetailed procedure on provisioning the DCN and the DCC information for the 1655AMU is given under the section, “Configuring a Data Communication Network(DCN)” in the “1655 AMU User Operations Guide”. Doing so will remove the NEfrom the isolated state and an association with the OMS will now be possible.

• When theManagement Stateis Normal in the window,Management→ NodeDetails, verify the DCN and the DCC information in the window,Edit ProvisionedDCN Information. A detailed procedure on viewing the DCN and the DCCinformation for the 1655 AMU is given under the section, “Configuring a DataCommunication Network (DCN)” in the “1655 AMU User Operations Guide”

ITM-CIT installation and NE provisioning Provisioning system parametersConfirm/Update the MIB

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

6-24 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 211: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

7 7Stand alone testprocedures

Overview

Purpose

This chapter describesacceptancetestsproceduresthat must be performed to ensurethat the installation of the NE with all assembled parts such as circuit packs andcabling, is completed and functioning correctly. Tests for individual parts are notrequired as these have been performed in the factory.

Before you begin

Ensure that the assumptions listed below are fulfilled before carrying out any tests:

• All NEs mustbe mounted and cabled correctly (see Chapters 3 and 4).

• The battery voltages are connected to the power connector and checked (seechapter 5). An earth connection has been made.

• The correct software has been installed (see chapter 6).

• The area address must be available to enter into the DCN parameters. This isrequired to get the card out of the (OSI) isolated state.

• The people carrying out the tests are familiar with 1655 AMU, the SDHfunctionality, the ITM-CIT software and the handling of the test equipment.

Additional remarks

The following points should also be observed:

• If the acceptanceinvolves a 1655 AMU NE without a tributary card and withoutthe DDF cabling, then the test is very limited as all ports are factory tested.

• If a DDF is involved, the connected cabling needs to be tested for each interface.This is done by executing the port test on the DDF.

• If a tributary card is involved, then each port of this card has to be tested on theoutlet of the 1655 AMU or, if applicable, on the DDF, to prove a proper function.

Contents

Preparation and test of the AMU subrack 7-3

Preparation of main card equipment protection 7-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

7-1

Page 212: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 port connection to optical distribution frame test 7-5

Main card equipment protection test 7-10

PDH/DSx option card test 7-13

Ethernet Private Line (EPL) option card test 7-16

Switched Ethernet option card test 7-19

NE provisioning and stand alone installation test exit checklist 7-21

Stand alone test procedures Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-2 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 213: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Preparation and test of the AMU subrack

Overview

This sectiondescribes the preparation and test of a 1655 AMU 2H (1m/1o) or 6H2m/4o subrack.

Important! If the Area Address to be applied is not available, then leave thesystem isolated until the value is available. The reason for this is that value 0000 isreserved for newly installed systems and should not be used in live networks.Editing the area address will get the NE out of the isolated state.

Estimated duration

15 minutes.

Procedure

Proceed as follows to perform the test:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Connect the ITM-CIT to the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Create the node. If available, use the operator specified name of the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Provision the DCN parameter Area ID; set it to the operator specified value (e.g.0001).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Verify that the requirements mentioned in the table below are met.

Result:

Requirements

Node isolated: No

LEDs on the 1655 AMU main card:

Active: On

Fail: Off

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Stand alone test procedures Preparation and test of the AMU subrack

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

7-3

Page 214: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Preparation of main card equipment protection

Overview

This sectiondescribes the equipment protection preparation of a 1655 AMU 2m/4osubrack with twomain cards inserted.

Estimated duration

5 minutes.

Procedure

Proceed as follows to perform the test:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Connect the ITM-CIT to the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Assign the second main card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enable theMain Card Equipment Protection Group from the protection menu.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Verify that the requirements mentioned in the table below are met.

Result:

Requirements

LEDs on the 1655 AMU:

Main card 1 “Active” LED: Off

Main card 2 “Active” LED: On

Main card 1 “Fail” LED: Off

Main card 2 “Fail” LED: Off

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Stand alone test procedures Preparation of main card equipment protection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-4 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 215: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 port connection to optical distributionframe test

Overview

This test checks the connections of the optical STM-1, STM-4, and STM-16 ports.This test is applicable to STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 ports located on both the main cardsand the option cards. The correct labeling on the ODF is checked by monitoring thesource of the reported alarm. The quality of the physical optical connections to theODF is checked by measuring the optical power and by performing a receiversensitivity test.

This test covers the procedure for one port. If more ports need to be checked, thisprocedure should be repeated.

If qualified and correct speed modules are present, the system will accept and usethose without further provisioning actions. More SFP information is given in chapter 2,section“Pluggable SFPs” (p. 2-8).

Estimated duration

10 minutes.

Required test equipment

The following test equipment is needed:

• Analyzer

• Optical attenuator, single mode, 1310/1550 nm

• Optical power meter

• Electrical test cables.

Test setup

The following figure illustrates a possible test setup.

Stand alone test procedures STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 port connection to opticaldistribution frame test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

7-5

Page 216: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Where x stands for

• L (a line port) in case of a main card or

• T (a tributary port) in case of an option card

and y stands for the slot position for the port under test.

Procedure

Proceed as follows to perform the test:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Connect the ITM-CIT to the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Install a fiber loop on xPy.1 on the ODF.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Set the Line Ports (xPy.1 and xPy.2) to “Not Monitored”.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Provision a VC-4 cross-connection from xPy.1 to xPy.2.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Set the Alarm Reporting of STM*cNES (STM* Not Expected Input Signal) alarm to“Yes”. (* stands for “1”, “4” or “16”, depending on the port type under test).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Connect the analyzer to the xPy.2 port.

Figure 7-1 STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 port connection to optical distribution frametest

SDH Analyser

AMU

LP1.1

LP2.1

VariableOpticalAttenuator

OpticalPowerMeter

ODF

Connections for opticalPower Measurements

Connections forreceiver Sensitivity

XPy.1

XPy.2

Analyzer

Stand alone test procedures STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 port connection to opticaldistribution frame test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-6 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 217: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Use the following settings:

• Signal:STM-* (* stands for “1”, “4” or “16” depending on the port type under test)

• Payload:140 Mbit/s, unframed

• Pattern:223-1 PRBS pattern

• Clock: Synchronize analyzer to incoming signal

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Display the raised alarm list on the ITM-CIT, and verify that the requirementsmentioned inthe table below are met.

Result:

Requirements

Analyzer: No errors

Alarms reported on manager: “STM*cNES”, STM* Not ExpectedInput Signal

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Check if the slot and port number of the NES alarm source corresponds with thephysical positionon the ODF to which the optical loop is connected.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Set the ports (xPy.1 and xPy.2) to “Monitored”.

Result:

Requirements

Analyzer: No errors

Alarms reported on manager: No alarms

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Connect the optical power meter to the fiber returning from the ODF (xPy.1 input)(refer toFigure 7-1, “STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 port connection to optical distributionframe test” (p. 7-6)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Measure the optical transmit power level.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Verify that the requirements mentioned in the table below are met.

Stand alone test procedures STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 port connection to opticaldistribution frame test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

7-7

Page 218: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Result:

Table 7-1 Mean launched power ranges

Interface Wavelength [nm] Power range [dBm]

S1.1 1310 –15 ... –8

S4.1 1310 –15 ... –8

L1.1 1310 –5 ... 0

L1.2 1550 –5 ... 0

L4.1 1310 –3 ... +2

L4.2 1550 –3 ... +2

I16.1 1310 -10 ... -3

S16.1 1310 -5 ... 0

L16.1 1310 -2 ... 3

L16.2 1550 -2 ... 3

Note: Subtract 0.50 dB per optical connection (for the suggested set-up 1.5 dB(3 connections)) and subtract 0.2 dB per fiber segment (0.4 dB for 2 fibersegments).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Disconnect the optical power meter and reconnect the fiber to the receiving port ofxPy.1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Remove the optical loop from the ODF and install a variable optical attenuator.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Increase the attenuation until the analyzer reports single bit errors.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Decrease the attenuation a little until no errors are reported.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Wait approximately 5 minutes (no errors may occur).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Connect the optical power meter to the fiber returning from the ODF (xPy.1 input)(refer toFigure 7-1, “STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 port connection to optical distributionframe test” (p. 7-6)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Measurethe optical output level.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Verify that the requirements mentioned in the table below are met.

Stand alone test procedures STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 port connection to opticaldistribution frame test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-8 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 219: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Result:

Table 7-2 Receiver sensitivity ranges

Interface Wavelength [nm] Receiver sensitivity [dBm]

S1.1 1310 ≤ –28

S4.1 1310 ≤ –34

L1.1 1310 ≤ –34

L1.2 1550 ≤ –34

L4.1 1310 ≤ –28

L4.2 1550 ≤ –28

I16.1 1310 ≤ –18

S16.1 1310 ≤ –18

L16.1 1310 ≤ –27

L16.2 1550 ≤ –28

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Repeat the test for all the available ports including the ports on the second main cardand the option cards, if installed.

Cleaning up

Restore all provisioning parameters, test equipment settings, and connections set in theprocedure above.

Stand alone test procedures STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 port connection to opticaldistribution frame test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

7-9

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 220: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Main card equipment protection test

Overview

This sectiondescribes the main card equipment protection test and is only applicablefor 1655 AMU 2m/4o subracks with two main cards inserted.

Estimated duration

5 minutes.

Test setup

The following figure illustrates a possible test setup.

Procedure

Proceed as follows to perform the test:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Connect the ITM-CIT to the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Install a fiber loop on LP1.1 on the ODF.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Set the Line Ports (LP1.1 and LP1.2) to “Monitored”.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Provision a VC-4 cross-connection from LP1.1 to LP1.2.

Figure 7-2 Main card equipment protection test

SDH Analyser

AMU

LP1.1

LP2.1

VariableOpticalAttenuator

OpticalPowerMeter

ODF

Connections for opticalPower Measurements

Connections forreceiver Sensitivity

LP1.1

LP1.2

Analyzer

Stand alone test procedures Main card equipment protection test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-10 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 221: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Connectthe analyzer to the LP1.2 port.

Use the followingsettings:

• Signal:STM-* (* stands for “1”, “4” or “16” depending on the port type under test)

• Payload:140 Mbit/s, unframed

• Pattern:223-1 PRBS pattern

• Clock: Synchronize analyzer to incoming signal

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Display the raised alarm list on the ITM-CIT, and verify that the requirementsmentioned in thetable below are met.

Result:

Requirements

Analyzer: No errors

Alarms reported on the ITM-CIT: No alarms

LEDs on the 1655 AMU:

Main card 1 “Active” LED: Off

Main card 2 “Active” LED: On

Main card 1 “Fail” LED: Off

Main card 2 “Fail” LED: Off

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Execute aManual to Protection switch request from the equipment protectionwindow.

Result:

Requirements

Analyzer: No errors

Alarms reported on the ITM-CIT: No alarms

LEDs on the 1655 AMU:

Main card 1 “Active” LED: On

Main card 2 “Active” LED: Off

Main card 1 “Fail” LED: Off

Main card 2 “Fail” LED: Off

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Execute aClear switch request from the equipment protection window.

Stand alone test procedures Main card equipment protection test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

7-11

Page 222: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Result:

Requirements

Analyzer: No errors

Alarms reported on the ITM-CIT: No alarms

LEDs on the 1655 AMU:

Main card 1 “Active” LED: Off

Main card 2 “Active” LED: On

Main card 1 “Fail” LED: Off

Main card 2 “Fail” LED: Off

Cleaning up

Restore all provisioning parameters, test equipment settings, and connections set in theprocedure above.

Stand alone test procedures Main card equipment protection test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-12 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 223: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

PDH/DSx option card test

Overview

This testverifies that the option card has been installed properly and that its function iscorrect.

If a DDF is applicable, then the cabling and connections of the option card ports withcomplementary wiring is tested according to the site depending information, and theport labeling is tested on the DDF whether it matches the correct port number.

This test includes a BER test for each option card tributary port, and a port alarm test.

Estimated duration

20 minutes

Remarks

If the installation includes a DDF, then the interface test must be done from the DDF.For 1.5 Mbit/s (DS1) and 45 Mbit/s (DS3) ports: since the pulse shape for thesesignals is defined at the DDF, the cable length between the port and the DDF can becompensated for each port output (menu:Port Provisioning, Cable length).

By default, the cablecompensation is set to 0–40 meter (DS1) or 0–35 meter (DS3). Inthis test, the PDH analyzer receiver will deal with the cable loss, only because it isconnected close to the DDF. However, for each port, the length between port and DDFshould be estimated and compensated by selecting the proper length range before theother side is connected.

Test setup

The following figure illustrates a possible test setup:

Figure 7-3 PDH/DSx option card test

AMU

TPx.1

TPx.yIn

Out

In

Out

TransmissionanalyzerIn

Out

Opticalloop Line Port 1

Line Port 2

x= slot numbery= port number

Stand alone test procedures PDH/DSx option card test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

7-13

Page 224: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

NOTE 1:For a long haul laser (L11, L12, L41 or L42) a 10 dB attenuator withapplicable connector is required in the loop.

NOTE 2: In case of an E1 interface there are two interfaces per RJ45 connection (isdifferent to AM/AMS). 75Ω or 120Ω can be selected via the user interface for the E1interfaces which are located on the EPL4_E14 and ESW4_E14 option cards (default:120 Ω).

Start condition

Be sure the following start condition is fulfilled:

• The procedure in section“Preparation and test of the AMU subrack” (p. 7-3)musthave been performed and the test results are correct.

• The ITM-CIT must be connected and logged in to the NE.

• Test setup as shown in the figure above.

Procedure

Proceed as follows to perform the PDH option card test:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Assign the installed option card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If an E3 or DS3 option card is installed, then provision the TUG structure of CC1,1 totwo times TU-3.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Provision for each port of the option card tributary a cross-connection to LP1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Change the default Alarm Reporting/Severity settings of the applicable NES alarmfrom reported “No” to “Yes”.

• E1 option card:E12cNES (2 Mbit/s Not Expected Input Signal)

• DS1 option card:E11cNES (1.5 Mbit/s Not Expected Input Signal)

• E3 option card:E31cNES (34 Mbit/s Not Expected Input Signal)

• DS3 option card:E32cNES (45 Mbit/s Not Expected Input Signal)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Set the PDH analyzer to the appropriate PDH bit rate (and line code) and select for 1.5Mbit/s or 2 Mbit/s the 215-1 PRBS pattern, for all other bit-rates the 223-1 PRBS pattern.Connect the PDH analyzer to the first option card tributary port. Start a BER test.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Monitor the analyzer for correct transmission. If a DDF is applied, then check for badcontacts of the installed cable by moving each separate cable gently (or tap on it withyour fingers) near the connector at both ends, while monitoring the analyzer for errorfree transmission.

Stand alone test procedures PDH/DSx option card test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-14 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 225: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Display the raised alarm list on the ITM-CIT, and verify that the requirementsmentioned inthe table below are met.

Result:

Requirement

LEDs on the 1655 AMU:

Power: On

Fault: Off

PDH analyzer: No errors detected

Alarms reported on the ITM-CIT: “xxcNES”, y Mbit/s Not ExpectedInput Signal1

1 Not Expected Input Signal alarm refer toStep 4.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Check if the slot and port number of the NES alarm source corresponds with thephysical position on the DDF to which the analyzer is connected.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Disconnect the incoming signal from the port under test.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Repeat this test for all present option card tributary ports.

Cleaning up

Restore all provisioning parameters, test equipment settings, and connections set in theprocedure above.

Stand alone test procedures PDH/DSx option card test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

7-15

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 226: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Ethernet Private Line (EPL) option card test

Overview

This test verifies that the Ethernet Private Line (EPL) option card under test is properlyinstalled and that it functions correctly. In case of a DDF, the connections are tested bygenerating a port alarm.

This test applies to the following EPL option cards:

• X8PL

• EPL4_E14

• EPL4_E132_75

The X8PL option card is equipped with:

• 8 × E/FE interfaces (10/100Base-T) available via port LANn.1 and LANn.8.

The EPL4_E14 option card is equipped with:

• 4 × E1 interfaces available via port number TPn.1-4. These ports are not covered inthis paragraph but should be tested according to the procedure outlined in section“PDH/DSx option card test” (p. 7-13).

• 2 × E/FE interfaces (10/100Base-T) available via port LANn.5 and LANn.6.

• 2 × E/FE/GBE interfaces where each interface can be used as 10/100/1000Base-Tor 1000Base-X. Using the port list, the user can choose to activate the electrical oroptical interface. Therefore, two port groups are created. In case LANn.7 is madeactive, LANn.8 will be inactive. Same is true for ports LANn.9 and LANn.10.

The EPL4_E132_75 option card is equipped with:

• 32 × E1 (75Ω) interfaces available via port number TPn.1-32. These ports are notcoveredin this paragraph but should be tested according to the procedure outlinedin section“PDH/DSx option card test” (p. 7-13).

• 2 × E/FE interfaces (10/100Base-T) available via port LANn.33-36.

Important! The procedure in section“STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 port connection tooptical distribution frame test” (p. 7-5)must have been performed with totalaccuracy. This test covers the procedure for one port. In case more ports need to betested, this procedure shall be repeated.

Estimated duration

10 minutes.

Required test equipment

The following test equipment is needed:

• Ethernet analyzer

• Optical fiber

• CAT5 UTP cables.

Stand alone test procedures Ethernet Private Line (EPL) option card test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-16 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 227: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Test setup

The following figure illustrates a possible test setup:

Procedure

Proceed as follows to perform the X8PL option card test:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Connect the ITM-CIT to the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Install a fiber loop on LP1.1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Assign the installed option card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Create VCGx.1 with one VC-12 member.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Provision VC-4 and VC-12 cross-connections from LP1.1 to VCGx.1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Set the Alarm Reporting of LANcNES (LAN Not Expected Input Signal) alarm to“Yes”.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Make sure LANn.5 port is set to Auto Negotiation Mode “Enabled” (default).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Ethernet analyzer tested for correct functioning. It is suggested to perform a check thatthe Ethernetanalyzerruns by looping two LAN ports to each other. Let the analyzertransmit frames and monitor the received frames.

Figure 7-4 EPL option card test

AMU

LANn.5

LANn.10In

Out

In

Out

EthernetanalyzerIn

Out

Opticalloop Line Port 1

Line Port 2

n = slot number

Stand alone test procedures Ethernet Private Line (EPL) option card test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

7-17

Page 228: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Programthe Ethernet analyzer LAN port to Auto Negotiation “Enabled”. If theanalyzer does notsupport this then the manual settings (Speed and Duplex mode) ofanalyzer and LAN port must be provisioned to match.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Connect the Ethernet analyzer to the LANn.5 port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Generate random frames of with a utilization of 1% (or smaller).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Start the Ethernet analyzer transmitting frames for 1 minute and monitor the LAN portstatus andthe received number of frames.

Result:

Requirements

LEDs on the 1655 AMU:

Power LED: On

Fault LED: Off

Alarms reported on the ITM-CIT: “LANcNES” on LAN Port under test

Ethernet analyzer: - Link up with LAN under test

- Received number of frames matchesthe number of transmitted frames

- Frames received without errors

Cleaning up

Restore all provisioning parameters, test equipment settings, and connections set in theprocedure above.

Stand alone test procedures Ethernet Private Line (EPL) option card test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-18 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 229: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Switched Ethernet option card test

Overview

This test verifies that the Switched Ethernet option card under test is properly installedand that it functions correctly. In case of a DDF, the connections are tested bygenerating a port alarm.

This test applies to the following EPL option cards:

• X4IPV2

• ESW4_E14

• EOP4_E132

• EOP4_E132_75

The X4IP-V2 option card is equipped with:

• 4 × E/FE interfaces (10/100Base-T) available via port LANn.1 and LANn.4.

The ESW4_E14 option card is equipped with:

• 4 × E1 interfaces available via port number TPn.1-4. These ports are not covered inthis paragraph but should be tested according to the procedure outlined in section“PDH/DSx option card test” (p. 7-13).

• 2 × E/FE interfaces (10/100Base-T) available via port LANn.5 and LANn.6.

• 2 × E/FE/GBE interfaces where each interface can be used as 10/100/1000Base-Tor 1000Base-X. By means of the port list, the user can choose to activate theelectrical or optical interface. Therefore, two port groups are created. In caseLANn.7 is made active, LANn.8 will be inactive. Same is true for ports LANn.9and LANn.10.

Important! The procedure in section“STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 port connection tooptical distribution frame test” (p. 7-5)must have been performed with totalaccuracy. This test covers the procedure for one port. In case more ports need to betested, this procedure shall be repeated.

Estimated duration

10 minutes

Required test equipment

The following test equipment is needed:

• Ethernet analyzer

• Optical fiber

• CAT5 UTP cables.

Test setup

The following figure illustrates a possible test setup:

Stand alone test procedures Switched Ethernet option card test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

7-19

Page 230: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Procedure

Proceedasfollows to perform the switched Ethernet option card test:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Connect the ITM-CIT to the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Install a fiber loop on LP1.1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Assign the installed option card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Create a Virtual Switch in repeater mode with one LAN port and one WAN portassigned.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Provision the WAN capacity to 2 Mbps (1 × VC-12).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Provision VC-4 and VC-12 cross-connections from LP1.1 to TPx.y.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Set the Alarm Reporting of LANcNES (LAN Not Expected Input Signal) alarm to“Yes”.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Make sure LANx.y port is set to Auto Negotiation Mode “Enabled” (default).

Figure 7-5 Switched Ethernet option card test

AMU

LANx.y

LANx.zIn

Out

In

Out

EthernetanalyzerIn

Out

Opticalloop Line Port 1

Line Port 2

x = slot numbery & z = port number

Stand alone test procedures Switched Ethernet option card test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-20 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 231: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Ethernetanalyzertested for correct functioning. It is suggested to perform a check thatthe Ethernet analyzerruns by looping two LAN ports to each other. Let the analyzertransmit frames and monitor the received frames.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Program the Ethernet analyzer LAN port to Auto Negotiation “Enabled”. If theanalyzer doesnot support this then the manual settings (Speed and Duplex mode) ofanalyzer and LAN port must be provisioned to match.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Connect the Ethernet analyzer to the LANx.y port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Generate random frames of with a utilization of 1% (or smaller).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Start the Ethernet analyzer transmitting frames for 1 minute and monitor the LAN portstatus andthe received number of frames.

Result:

Requirements

LEDs on the 1655 AMU:

Power LED: On

Fault LED: Off

Alarms reported on the ITM-CIT: “LANcNES” on LAN Port under test

Ethernet analyzer: - Link up with LAN under test

- Received number of frames matchesthe number of transmitted frames

- Frames received without errors

Cleaning up

Restore all provisioning parameters, test equipment settings, and connections set in theprocedure above.

NE provisioning and stand alone installation test exit checklist

Stand alone test procedures Switched Ethernet option card test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

7-21

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 232: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Checklist

Verify that applicable procedures have been completed and fill-in the results. If aprocedure is notapplicable, indicate “N/A”.

Procedure Result(Passed, Failed, N/A)

Initials Notes

ITM-CIT installation

NE software installation

NE login

Provisioning of the systemparameters

Subrack preparation

Equipment protectionpreparation (main card)

STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 portconnection to opticaldistribution frame test

Main card equipmentprotection test

PDH/DSx option card test

EPL option card test

Switched Ethernet option cardtest

Stand alone test procedures NE provisioning and stand alone installation test exitchecklist

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7-22 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 233: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Part III: Link testing

Overview

Purpose

This part of the 1655 AMU Installation Guide contains link acceptance test procedureswhich shouldbe performed to test the functionality of the overall system.

Contents

This part of the document contains the following chapters:

• Chapter 8,Link testing

• Chapter9,Conclusion.

Entry checklist

The following provides a checklist to be completed prior to performing the link testing.Verify that each procedure has been completed. Check off and initial the item.

Procedure Completed Initials Notes

Have all procedures been completed which arerequired in Chapter 7,“NE provisioning andstand alone installation test exit checklist”(p. 7-21))?

Is the Element Management System LucentOMS available?

Is the following test equipment available?

• Optical power meter

• Analyzer

Contents

Chapter 8, Link testing 8-1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

III-1

Page 234: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Chapter 9, Conclusion 9-1

Link testing Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

III-2 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 235: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

8 8Link testing

Overview

Purpose

This section describes tests that need to be performed on each SDH connectionbetweentwo NEs.

The link acceptance tests can be used to:

• test a link between a local 1655 AMU node and another SDH node

• verify the requirements of a link

• document the test results, and archive it for future reference

• sign off on the link.

Before you begin

Ensure that the assumptions listed below are fulfilled before carrying out any tests:

• Stand alonetestshave been performed (see Chapter 7).

• Ensure that all fiber connectors are clean (see Appendix B, section“Fiber cleaning”(p. A-7)).

• The people carryingout the tests are familiar with 1655 AMU, the SDHfunctionality, the ITM-CIT software and the handling of the test equipment.

Contents

Optical received power test 8-2

Connection verification test 8-4

Transmission stability test 8-6

Link testing exit checklist 8-7

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

8-1

Page 236: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Optical received power test

Overview

This test verifies whether the received optical power at the optical interfaces is withinspecification. Itis executed for both line and tributary ports. Perform this test for boththe directions to ensure that correct attenuator values are used.

Estimated duration

5 minutes.

Required test equipment

Optical power meter.

Test setup

The following figure illustrates a possible test setup:

Procedure

DANGER

Laser hazard

1655 AMUsystemsoperate with invisible laser radiation. Laser radiation can causeconsiderable injuries to the eyes.

Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or into an open optical connector as longas the optical source is switched on. Always observe the laser warning instructions (cf.“Laser safety” (p. 1-8)).

Figure 8-1 Optical received power test

Opt.PowerMeter

Port x Port y

Opt.PowerMeter

Link testing Optical received power test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-2 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 237: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Proceed as follows to establish a network:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Connect an optical fiber between the ODF A at the side of port x (point A in testsetup) andthe optical power meter.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Set the optical power meter to the correct wavelength (see section“Optical inputpower ranges”(p. 8-3)) and measure the received optical power.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Check that the measured value is within the range given in section“Optical inputpower ranges” (p.8-3).

Optical input power ranges

Table 8-1 Optical input power ranges

Interface Wavelength [nm] Allowed range [dBm]

S1.1 1310 –28 ... –8

S4.1 1310 –28 ... –8

L1.1 1310 –34 ... –10

L1.2 1550 –34 ... –10

L4.1 1310 –28 ... –8

L4.2 1550 –28 ... –8

I16.1 1310 –18 ... –3

S16.1 1310 –18 ... 0

L16.1 1310 –27 ... –9

L16.2 1550 –28 ... –9

Cleaning up

Restore the fiber connection ofStep 1.

Link testing Optical received power test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

8-3

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 238: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Connection verification test

Overview

This testcan be used to verify if the physical fiber connections between the local andremote ODF arein place as intended. This is done by checking if the correct source IDon the remote node is displayed after removing the transmit fiber from the local port.

Normally, this test is only executed on line interfaces. However, if the tributary port ispart of an important link, one could decide to execute this test as well. For example,when the NE is the ring closure network element. The test describes only one directionbut both directions should be tested.

Estimated duration

10 minutes.

Test setup

The following figure illustrates a possible test setup.

Procedure

Proceed as follows to perform the connection verification test:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 With the ITM-CIT login to node A.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Remove the optical fiber from port x (OUT) on node A (see test setup).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Set both ports of the link to “Monitored”.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Set the Alarm Reporting ofMSxcRDI (STM-x MS Remote Defect Indicator; x = “1”,“4” or “16” depending on the port type) to “Yes”.

Figure 8-2 Connection verification test

LPx.1 LPy.1

Link testing Connection verification test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-4 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 239: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Result:

Requirements Alarm reported

Node A LPx MSxcRDI; STM-x MS Remote Defect Indicator

Node B LPy STMxcLOS; STM-x Loss Of Input Signal

Node C STM-x Network Connection Server failed

Note: Verify if the source IDs of the alarms reported at nodes A and B correspondwith the port IDs of the intended link.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Check if the slot and port number of the NES alarm source corresponds with thephysical position onthe ODF to which the optical loop is connected.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Connect an optical fiber from port x (OUT) on node A to port y (IN) on node B.

Result:

Requirements Alarm reported

Node A No alarms

Node B No alarms

Cleaning up

Restore all provisioning parameters, test equipment settings, and connections set in theprocedure above.

Link testing Connection verification test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

8-5

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 240: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Transmission stability test

Overview

This testdescribes the procedure for thetransmission stability testto prove thetransmission quality of the link by monitoring one VC-4 channel over a longer periodof time.

Normally, this test is only executed on line interfaces. However, if the tributary port ispart of an important link, one could decide to execute this test as well. For example,when the NE is the ring closure network element.

Important! Please observe the following points:

• If this optical link section is an end-to-end connection, a 12-hour stability testshould be performed.

• If this section is a part of an end-to-end optical connection, an additional12-hour stability test must be performed from the first node of that connection.

• If this section is a part of a ring, an additional 12-hour stability test must bemade through the whole ring.

• A tributary card is present in TSx of node A.

Estimated duration

80 minutes.

Required test equipment

Analyzer

Test setup

The following figure illustrates a possible test setup:

Remark: Node A is expected to be a 1655 AMU node.

Figure 8-3 Transmission stability test

LPx.1 LPy.1

TPx.1

Analyzer

Link testing Transmission stability test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-6 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 241: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Procedure

Proceedasfollows to perform a transmission stability test:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 With the ITM-CIT login to node A.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Connect the analyzer to the TPx.1 (2 Mbit/s) port of node A.

Use thefollowing settings:

• Signal:2 Mbit/s

• Payload:unframed

• Pattern:215-1 PRBS pattern

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Make onnode A a bi-directional VC-12 cross-connection from LPx.1,q to TPx.1 (x =physical port,q = VC-4 number).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Make on node B a uni-directional VC-4 cross-connection from LPy.1,q to a 2 Mbit/sport. Provision anoutloop on this 2 Mbit/s port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Start a bit error performance test for 1 hour.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Verify that the requirement mentioned below is met.

Result:

Requirement

Analyzer: No errors detected

Cleaning up

Restore all provisioning parameters, test equipment settings, and connections set in theprocedure above.

Link testing exit checklist

Link testing Transmission stability test

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

8-7

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 242: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Checklist

Verify that applicable procedures have been completed and fill-in the results. If aprocedure is notapplicable, indicate “N/A”.

Procedure Result(Passed, Failed, N/A)

Initials Notes

Optical received power test

Connection verification test

Transmission stability test

Link testing Link testing exit checklist

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

8-8 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 243: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

9 9Conclusion

Overview

Purpose

This chapter provides result tables for entering the measured values, a final checklistanda sign-off sheet to be sure that the required tasks described in this manual havebeen done.

Contents

Power supply measurements 9-1

Optical output power measurements 9-2

Final checklist 9-3

Completion form 9-3

Power supply measurements

Measured values

Measured voltage

DC

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

9-1

Page 244: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Optical output power measurements

Measured values

AMUnumber

Interface type Portnumber

Mean launchedpower [dBm]

Receiver sensitivity[dBm]

Conclusion Optical output power measurements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-2 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 245: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Final checklistVerify that all chapters in this manual have been passed completely.

Chapter Passed(Yes, No)

Initials Notes

Mechanical installation

System cabling

System turn up

System provisioning

Stand alone test procedures

Network establishment and test

If all the chapters have been completed successfully, please sign the Completion Form.

Completion form

Conclusion Final checklist

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

9-3

Page 246: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Conclusion Completion form

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

9-4 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 247: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Appendix A: Installation troubleshooting

Overview

Purpose

This chapter provides basic installation troubleshooting information for the 1655 AMUsystem.

Contents

Power failure A-2

Installing the NE software A-3

Parameters for NE software installation A-5

Fiber cleaning A-7

Removing the SFP modules A-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

A-1

Page 248: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Power failure

Overview

The procedures described below should be performed if the 1655 AMU poweringprocedure wasunsuccessful(see chapter 5, section“Switching on and testing supplyvoltage” (p. 5-5)).

Procedure

Follow the steps below if the “FAIL” LED does not light up on the main card:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Switch off the power.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Replace all affected power cables between the BDFB (or PDP) and the 1655 AMU.Make surethat the cables are tight afterwards.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Switch on the power.

IF ... THEN ...

the “FAIL” LED does not light up, switch off the power and replace the main card.

the “FAIL” LED lights up, END OF STEPS

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Installation trouble shooting Power failure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A-2 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 249: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Installing the NE software

Overview

The procedures described below must be performed in case a software downloadfailure occurred with the fast download application.

For installing the NE software manually, two procedures must be performed:

• NE software download into an NE

• Switch the software Stores of the NE.

These procedures can also be performed separately.

Related information

Parameters used in this procedure can be found in section“Parameters for NE softwareinstallation” (p. A-5).

Before you begin

Before starting the NE software download, make sure:

• The required controller software is available on the management system or onCD-ROM.

• There is sufficient time to complete the procedure. The procedure lasts about onehour.

• not to download software into the backup store while the active store is notcommitted. As long as the active store is not committed, the NE may perform anautomatic switch.

• not to forget to commit the software after performing a switch. If this is not done,the NE will switch back to the previous active software after 2 hours.

NE software download

Proceed as follows to perform the NE software download:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 SelectProvisioning → Equipment → NE Software Configuration.

Result: The NE Software Configurationwindow appears with information aboutthe software currently stored in the active and backup store of the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Edit.

Result: The Edit NE Software Configurationwindow appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Download.

Installation trouble shooting Installing the NE software

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

A-3

Page 250: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Result: A window appears allowing for the selection of the appropriate file to bedownloaded.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Browse to the folder where the NE software is stored. The NE software can bedownloaded either from floppies or from the hard drive in the PC. Select the filecontaining the NE software and clickOpen.

Result: The Software Download Progress Displaywindow appears and the progressof the software download is displayed.

To abort the NE software download clickAbort.

Switch the software stores of the NE

Proceed as follows to switch the software stores of a NE:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Determine whether the MIB (Management Information Base) is compatible with theNE software. If the MIB is not compatible, the MIB cannot be retained and must beprovisioned again with new settings after the software switch.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 SelectProvisioning → Equipment → NE Software Configuration.

Result: The NE Software Configurationwindow appears with information aboutthe software currently stored in the active and backup store of the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Edit.

Result: The Edit NE Software Configurationwindow appears.Check if the correctsoftware version is stored in the backup store. After the switch, this will be theactive software running the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Fill in the Retain MIB check box if the information in the MIB should be saved. Thisis only possible if the MIB is compatible with the NE software. Not retaining the MIBmeans that the NE must be provisioned again with the new settings.

Click Switch.

Result: A confirmation window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Yes.

Installation trouble shooting Installing the NE software

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A-4 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 251: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Result: The activeand backup stores are switched. The ITM-CIT loses itsconnection to thenetwork element. The NE resets. This takes about 10 minutes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Login to the NE again and selectProvisioning → Equipment → NE Software Configuration again.

Result: The NE is now using the software that was previously in the backup store.The NE Software configurationwindow shows that the current content of the activeand backup store. TheActive Store Stateis Store Active Not Committed. If the NEsoftware in the active store is not committed within 2 hours, the NE will switch thestores back to its previous settings.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 SelectEdit and clickCommit in the Edit NE Software configurationwindow.

Result: The software in the active store is committed. TheActive Store StatebecomesStore Active. The NE will not switch back to its previous settings.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Parameters for NE software installation

Introduction

The following parameters are used for the NE software installation.

Active store

The software version of the executing code of the software loaded in the NEs activestore isdescribedby four codes.

Code Description

Actual Item Code A code used to uniquely identify any systemcomponent.

Interchangeability Marker An identification mark to indicate interchangeabilityamong components

Serial Number A number that indicates the sequence number and theyear, date and location of manufacture.

Com Code A code which identifies the component.

Backup store

Shows the software load that is now stored in the backup store. The same codes areused as in the active store.

Installation trouble shooting Installing the NE software

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

A-5

Page 252: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Active store state

The following table shows the possible values.

Value Description

Store Active Memory contains a valid code that is being executed.

Store Active NotCommitted

If no association is made between the management systemand the NE after a software switch.

The software that was active before the switch is now inthe backup store. If the association is not made within 2hours after the switch, the system will switch the storesback so that the previous active software is made activeagain. Therefore it is not wise to download softwarewhile the active store is in this state.

Backup store state

The state of the backup store can have the following values:

Value Description

Store Error Memory has corrupted data.

Store Clearing After the download command has been given the inactivestore is cleared first. When the backup store is in thisstate the NE software download cannot be aborted. Toabort the NE software download wait until the backupstore state isStore Downloading.

Store Empty The clearing of the store has been successful and newsoftware will now be downloaded.

Store Downloading Code is being downloaded to the memory.

Store Inactive Memory contains valid code that is not being executed.

Installation trouble shooting Parameters for NE software installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A-6 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 253: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Fiber cleaning

Overview

This procedure describes the Nokia recommended method for the cleaning and inspection of optical connectors using specific tools and materials that have been proven to be effective in the assembly and testing of optical transmission equipment. It is critical that the connector endfaces are clean and free from particular contamination to assure proper performance and reliability of lightwave systems. With the modern high-speed, high-power and wider bandwidth optical transmission systems, clean connectors along the optical path are absolutely essential for successful operation.

Before working with optical fiber cables please observe the following safety warnings:

DANGER

Laser hazard

Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or plug-in optical connectors as long asthe optical source is switched on.

NOTICE

Cable break

To avoid cable break ensure that the bending radius of optical fiber cables is not lessthan 38 mm [1.5 inches] or 20 times the diameter of the cable (whichever is greater).

Cleaning of optical connectors

Optical connectors are only to be cleaned in accordance with the cleaning instructionslisted below.

If impurities are assumed, the use of a fiberscope is recommended in order to checkthe connector face for impurities (e.g. fluff, dust particles). A fiberscope with amagnification x 200 is preferred.

Connectors

If impurities are discovered, the optical connector must be cleaned in accordance withthe following rules:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Wipe off the connector facelengthwise(not with a circular motion) using asmoothtissue (moistenedwith isopropanol).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Wipe off the connector facelengthwise(not with a circular motion) using adry andsmoothtissue.

Installation trouble shooting Fiber cleaning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

A-7

Page 254: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Then let the connector face air-dry (the isopropanol must evaporate completely). As anoption, purified compressed air can also be used for drying.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If necessary, the connector face can additionally be dabbed on the tape dispenser.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Finally, check the connector face for cleanliness using the fiberscope.

If the connector impurities were not removed completely during the first cleaningprocedure, repeatStep 1to Step 5until the result is satisfactory.

NOTE:

Do not connect the optical connectors without checking them for impurities under thefiberscope.

Coupling

Impurities caused by dust particles or fluff etc. can also occur on the optical coupling.To clean the coupling, follow the instructions below:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Soak the coupling cleaner in isopropanol and move it back and forth in the couplingseveral times.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Blow purified compressed air through the coupling and visually check for residualimpurities by holding it to the light.

Important! Lightguide Build-Outs (LBOs) may be damaged when compressed airis used for drying. Therefore, do not use compressed air for drying LBOs.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Installation trouble shooting Fiber cleaning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A-8 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 255: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Removing the SFP modules

Overview

The procedures described below provide removal instructions for the following SFPtypes:

• MSA latch (type 1)

• MSA latch (type 2)

• Bail latch “bottom up” (= type 1)

• Bail latch “top down” (= type 2).

Safety

NOTICE

ESD hazard

Electronic components can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.

Hold SFPs only at the edges. Always observe the ESD instructions (cf.“Card and SFPhandling” (p. 2-18)).

MSA latch (type 1)

Proceed as follows to remove this type of SFP:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Put the fibers away from the transceiver.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Slide the bar back by using a screwdriver (see figure below).

Result: There should be a small click, or it should be visible that the transceiverwas moved a bit out of its latch.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Grip the SFP transceiver with your fingers and pull it out.

Installation trouble shooting Removing the SFP modules

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

A-9

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 256: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure

MSA latch (type 2)

Proceed as follows to remove this type of SFP:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Put the fibers away from the transceiver.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Press the top of the locking device and pull the SFP out with your fingers (see figurebelow).

Figure A-1 Unlocking an MSA latch (type 1) SFP

Installation trouble shooting Removing the SFP modules

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A-10 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 257: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure

Bail latch (type 1)

Proceed as follows to remove this type of SFP:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Put the fibers away from the transceiver.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Move the bail downwards (see figure below).

Result: There should be a small click, or it should be visible that the transceiverwas moveda bit out of its latch.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Grip the SFP transceiver with your own fingers and pull it out.

Important! Don’t pull the bail to get the transceiver out, as the bail might beteared away from the SFP.

Figure A-2 Unlocking an MSA latch (type 2) SFP

Installation trouble shooting Removing the SFP modules

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

A-11

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 258: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure

Bail latch (type 2)

Proceed as follows to remove this type of SFP:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Put the fibers away from the transceiver.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Move the bail upwards (see figure below).

Result: There should be a small click, or it should be visible that the transceiverwas moveda bit out of its latch.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Grip the SFP transceiver with your own fingers and pull it out.

Important! Don’t pull the bail to get the transceiver out, as the bail might beteared away from the SFP.

Figure A-3 Unlocking a bail latch (type 1) SFP

Installation trouble shooting Removing the SFP modules

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A-12 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 259: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure

Figure A-4 Unlocking a bail latch (type 2) SFP

Installation trouble shooting Removing the SFP modules

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

A-13

Page 260: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview
Page 261: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Appendix B: Cablespecifications

Overview

Purpose

This appendix provides specifications for all cables which are mentioned in chapter 4.

Contents

Belden: YE00335 B-2

Belden: 46585/Lucent: 407128115 B-3

Belden: 46040/Lucent: 848004503 B-4

Belden: 46160 B-5

Belden: 46161/Lucent: 408386522 B-6

Belden: 46169/Lucent: 407529478 B-7

Belden: 46114/Lucent: 848068607 B-8

Nexans: ET2PB556/Lucent: 408386498 B-9

Nexans (Filotex®): ET2PA324 B-10

Nexans (Filotex®): ET2PF947 B-11

Nexans: 2PA329/Lucent: 848068607 B-12

Nexans: NCX1 B-13

Nexans: 296452 B-14

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

B-1

Page 262: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Belden: YE00335

Legend:

1 Core

2 Insulation

3 Pair

4 Foil

5 Screening

6 Jacket

Table B-1 Specifications (Belden: YE00335 cable)

Item Specification

Core Solid 0.4 mm soft annealed tinned copper wire

Insulation PE, overall diameter 0.84±0.05 mm

Pair 2x twisted wire, color schema according DIN 47100

Foil Polyester foil

Screening Aluminium polyester foil

Tinned copper braid, coverage > 90%

Drain wire under braid, solid 0.4 mm tinned copper wire

Jacket FRNC, grey

Overall diameter 5.4±0.30 mm

Impedance 100 Ω

Linear resistance 151Ω/km @ 20°C

Marking BELDEN YYYY 4-FOLD FRNC CABLE 100Ω 2*0.4 FES +meter marking

Temperature –20°C to +70°C (operating)

Figure B-1 Belden: YE00335 cable

Cable specifications Belden: YE00335

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B-2 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 263: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table B-1 Specifications (Belden: YE00335 cable) (continued)

Item Specification

Packaging non-returnable reels with nominal length of 500 m ± 5%

Belden: 46585/Lucent: 407128115

Legend:

1 Core

2 Insulation

3 Pair

4 Foil

5 Inner sheet

6 Screening

7 Jacket

Table B-2 Specifications (Belden: 46585/Lucent: 407128115 cables)

Item Specification

Core Solid 0.4 mm soft annealed tinned copper wire

Insulation PE, overall diameter 0.70±0.03 mm

Pair 2 × twisted wire, color schema according DIN 47100

Foil Polyester foil

Inner sheet FRNC

Overall diameter 6.00±0.20 mm

Screening Tinned copper braid, coverage > 90%

Figure B-2 Belden: 46585/Lucent: 407128115 cables

Cable specifications Belden: YE00335

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

B-3

Page 264: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table B-2 Specifications (Belden: 46585/Lucent: 407128115 cables)(continued)

Item Specification

Jacket FRNC, grey

Overall diameter 8.70±0.20 mm

Linear resistance 145Ω/km @ 20°C

Marking BELDEN YYYY 10*2*0.4 FRNC CABLE SCR + meter marking

Temperature –20°C to +85°C (operating)

Packaging non-returnable reels with nominal length of 500 m ± 5%

Belden: 46040/Lucent: 848004503

Legend:

1 Core

2 Insulation

3 Pair

4 Foil

5 Inner sheet

6 Screening

7 Jacket

Table B-3 Specifications (Belden: 46040/Lucent: 848004503 cables)

Item Specification

Core Solid 0.4 mm soft annealed tinned copper wire

Insulation PE, overall diameter 0.84±0.05 mm

Pair 2x twisted wire, color schema according DIN 47100

Figure B-3 Belden: 46040/Lucent: 848004503 cables

Cable specifications Belden: 46585/Lucent: 407128115

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B-4 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 265: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table B-3 Specifications (Belden: 46040/Lucent: 848004503 cables)(continued)

Item Specification

Foil Polyester foil

Inner sheet FRNC

Overall diameter 4.3±0.2 mm

Screening Aluminium polyester foil

Tinned copper braid, coverage > 60%

Jacket FRNC, grey

Overall diameter 6.2±0.30 mm

Impedance 120±10Ω @ 1 MHz

Linear resistance 145Ω/km @ 20°C

Marking BELDEN VENLO HOLLAND H1230 YYYY 4-FOLD FRNCUTP CABLE 120Ω 2*0.4ES + meter marking

Temperature –20°C to +85°C (operating)

Packaging non-returnable reels with nominal length of 500 m ± 5%

Belden: 46160

Legend:

1 Core

2 Inner dielectric

3 Outer dielectric

4 Braid

5 Sheath

Figure B-4 Belden: 46160 cable

Cable specifications Belden: 46040/Lucent: 848004503

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

B-5

Page 266: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table B-4 Specifications (Belden: 46160 cable)

Item Specification

Core Solid 0.254 mm soft annealed silvered copper wire

Inner dielectric FEP diameter 0.56±0.05 mm

Outer dielectric PE diameter 1.45±0.09 mm

Braid Soft annealed copper coverage > 90%

Diameter over braid 1.90 mm

Sheath FRNC, overall diameter 2.6±0.1 mm

Attenuation 9.0dB/100m @ 10 MHz

Impedance 75±2 Ω

Temperature –20°C to +70°C (operating)

Belden: 46161/Lucent: 408386522

Legend:

1 Core

2 Inner dielectric

3 Outer dielectric

4 Foil

5 Braid

6 Sheath single coax

7 Cable core

8 Ripcord

9 Overall sheath

Figure B-5 Belden: 46161/Lucent: 408386522 cables

Cable specifications Belden: 46160

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B-6 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 267: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table B-5 Specifications (Belden: 46161/Lucent: 408386522 cables)

Item Specification

Core Solid 0.254 mm soft annealed silvered copper wire

Inner dielectric FEP diameter 0.50±0.05 mm

Outer dielectric Foamed PE diameter 1.40±0.04 mm

Foil Laminated AI / Pet / AI

Braid Soft annealed tinned copper coverage > 90%

Sheath single coax FRNC, overall diameter 2.55-2.70 mm

Cable core Elements are numbered 1–8

Overall sheath FRNC, overall diameter 9.7±0.2 mm

Attenuation 3.2dB/100m @ 1 MHz

9.5dB/100m @ 10 MHz

Impedance 75±2 Ω

Marking 8 COAX 75 Ω – 2GE564 – MM/YY

Temperature –20°C to +70°C (operating)

Belden: 46169/Lucent: 407529478

Legend:

1 Core

2 Inner dielectric

3 Outer dielectric

4 Braid

5 Sheath

6 Cable core

Figure B-6 Belden: 46169/Lucent: 407529478 cables

Cable specifications Belden: 46161/Lucent: 408386522

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

B-7

Page 268: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

7 Ripcord

8 Inner overall sheath

9 Overall braid

10 Ripcord

11 Outer sheath

Table B-6 Specifications (Belden: 46169/Lucent: 407529478 cables)

Item Specification

Core Solid 0.254 mm soft annealed silvered copper wire

Inner dielectric FEP diameter 0.56±0.05 mm

Outer dielectric PE diameter 1.45±0.09 mm

Braid Soft annealed copper coverage > 90%

Diameter over braid 1.90 mm

Sheath FRNC, overall diameter 2.6±0.1 mm

Cable core Elements are numbered 1–8

Inner overall sheath FRNC, inner overall diameter 9.85±0.15 mm

Overall braid Soft annealed tinned copper coverage > 90%

Diameter over braid 10.75 mm

Outer sheath FRNC, outer overall diameter 12.1±0.3 mm

Attenuation 9.0dB/100m @ 10 MHz

Impedance 75±2 Ω

Marking BELDEN VENLO HOLLAND H131A YYYY 8-FOLD COAX0.25/1.45/2.5 ES SCR

Temperature –20°C to +70°C (operating)

Belden: 46114/Lucent: 848068607

Legend:

1 Core

Figure B-7 Belden: 46114 / Lucent: 848068607 cables

Cable specifications Belden: 46169/Lucent: 407529478

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B-8 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 269: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

2 Inner dielectric

3 Outer dielectric

4 Inner braid

5 Foil

6 Outer braid

7 Outer sheath

Table B-7 Specifications (Belden: 46114/Lucent: 848068607 cables)

Item Specification

Core Solid 0.4±0.01 mm soft annealed silvered copper wire

Inner dielectric FEP diameter≤ 0.9 mm

Outer dielectric PE diameter 2.42±0.1 mm

Inner braid Soft annealed tinned copper coverage > 90%,

Diameter over braid 2.87 mm

Foil Copper

Outer braid Soft annealed tinned copper coverage > 90%,

Diameter over braid 3.40 mm

Outer sheath FRNC, outer overall diameter 4.10±0.09 mm

Attenuation <5.2dB/100m @ 10 MHz

Impedance 75±2 Ω

Marking BELDEN VENLO HOLLAND YYWW 0.4/2.4/4.1 ES

Temperature –20°C to +70°C (operating)

Nexans: ET2PB556/Lucent: 408386498

Figure B-8 Nexans: ET2PB556/Lucent: 408386498 cables

Cable specifications Belden: 46114/Lucent: 848068607

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

B-9

Page 270: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Legend:

1 Core

2 Wrapping tape

3 Ripcord

4 Jacket

Table B-8 Specifications (Nexans: ET2PB556/Lucent: 408386498 cables)

Item Specification

Core Solid 0.26 mm silvered copper wire

Overall diameter 0.50±0.03 mm

Jacket Halogen free

Overall diameter 9.7±0.20 mm

Impedance 75±2 Ω

Attenuation 9dB/100m @ 10 MHz

Nexans (Filotex®): ET2PA324The figure below shows a 15 pair cable as example.

Legend:

1 Core

2 Drain wire

3 Foil

4 Braid

5 Jacket

Figure B-9 Nexans (Filotex®): ET2PA324 cable

Cable specifications Nexans: ET2PB556/Lucent: 408386498

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B-10 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 271: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

NOTE: The following specifications are valid for a 4 pair cable.

Table B-9 Specifications (Nexans (Filotex®): ET2PA324 cable)

Item Specification

Core Solid 0.4 mm

Overall diameter 0.68 mm

Drain wire Solid 0.4 mm

Foil Aluminum

Braid Tinned copper braid

Jacket Halogen free

Overall diameter 4.4±0.15 mm

Impedance 100 Ω

Linear resistance 151Ω/km @ 20°C

Weight 34.1 kg/km

Temperature –20°C to +80°C (operating)

Note: Useshrink sleeve under bread.

Nexans (Filotex®): ET2PF947

Wires 8x

RJ45 plugSleeve

Braid

Jacket

Figure B-10 Nexans (Filotex®): ET2PF947 cable

Cable specifications Nexans (Filotex®): ET2PA324

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

B-11

Page 272: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Legend:

1 Core

2 Polyester tape

3 Foil aluminum polyester

4 Drain wire

5 Braid

6 Jacket

Table B-10 Specifications (Nexans (Filotex®): ET2PF947 cable)

Item Specification

Core Solid 0.4 mm tinned copper wire

Overall diameter 0.86 mm

Drain wire Solid 0.4 mm tinned copper wire

Braid Tinned copper braid > 85% coverage

Jacket Halogen free

Overall diameter 5.4±0.2 mm

Impedance 120±15Ω @ 1 MHz

Attenuation 3dB/100m @ 1 MHz

Linear resistance 151Ω/km

Temperature –20°C to +80°C (operating)

Nexans: 2PA329/Lucent: 848068607

Legend:

1 Core

Figure B-11 Nexans: 2PA329/Lucent: 848068607 cables

Cable specifications Nexans (Filotex®): ET2PF947

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B-12 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 273: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

2 Inner dielectric

3 Outer dielectric

4 Inner braid

5 Foil

6 Outer sheath

Table B-11 Specifications (Nexans: 2PA329/Lucent: 848068607 cables)

Item Specification

Core Solid 0.4 mm silver plated copper wire

Inner dielectric FEP diameter 0.85 mm

Outer dielectric PE diameter 2.42 mm

Inner braid Tinned copper coverage > 90%

Diameter over inner braid 2.87 mm

Diameter over outer braid 3.37 mm

Foil Copper

Outer sheath Halogen free, overall diameter 4.07±0.15 mm

Attenuation <5.2db/100m @ 10 MHz

Impedance 75±2 Ω

Temperature –10°C to +85°C (operating)

Nexans: NCX1

Legend:

1 Core

2 Dielectric

Figure B-12 Nexans: NCX1 cable

Cable specifications Nexans: 2PA329/Lucent: 848068607

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

B-13

Page 274: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

3 Outer conductor

4 Outer sheath

Table B-12 Specifications (Nexans: NCX1 cable)

Item Specification

Core Solid 0.53 mm tinned copper wire

Dielectric 2.45±0.07 mm

Outer conductor Aluminium foil and tinned copper braid

Outer sheath LZSH grey, overall diameter 3.6±0.1 mm

Attenuation <4.5db/100m @ 10 MHz

<11.5db/100m @ 77.7 MHz

Impedance 75±3 Ω

Nexans: 296452

Legend:

1 Core

2 Tape

3 Jacket

4 Braid

5 Tape

6 Ripcord

7 Jacket

Figure B-13 Nexans: 296452 cable

Cable specifications Nexans: NCX1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B-14 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 275: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Table B-13 Specifications (Nexans: 296452 cable)

Item Specification

Core Solid 0.40 mm tinned copper wire

Overall diameter 0.84 mm

Tape Polyester

Jacket Halogen free

Overall diameter 4.30 mm

Braid 0.133mm tinned copper, > 60% coverage

Tape Aluminum polyester

Ripcord -

Jacket Halogen free

Overall diameter 6.20±0.30 mm

Attenuation <2.8db/100m @ 1 MHz

Resistance 145 W/km

Cable specifications Nexans: 296452

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

B-15

Page 276: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview
Page 277: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Appendix C: Cable assemblyinstructions

Overview

Purpose

This appendix contains general cable assembly instructions.

Contents

SUB-D connector C-2

Coax connector (1.6/5.6) C-5

Mounting 4 × 2.5 mm coax (75Ω) to RJ45 connector C-8

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

C-1

Page 278: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

SUB-D connector

Description

The amphenol metallic hoods for SUB-D connectors protect cable assemblies frommagnetic and radio interferences.

These hoods are easily assembled and suitable for all industrial and telecomapplications.

Assembly instructions

Please observe the following SUB-D assembly instructions:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Strip the cable as necessary.

Important! Protect the braid by stripping.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Prepare the braid as shown inFigure C-1, “SUB-D assembly steps” (p. C-3).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Solder the wires to the pin contacts.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Put the ferrules around the braid on the cable.

Important! Shape the strands of braid into two pigtails and bend these pigtailsback 180 degrees over the ferrule.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Insert the cable with the ferrule into the SUB-D connector.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Close the connector by tightening the screws.

Cable assembly instructions SUB-D connector

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

C-2 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 279: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figures

Soldering the ground wire

For soldering the ground wire, proceed as follows:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Turn the stripped end of the ground wire around the braid before soldering the groundwire to the braid.

Refer to“Stripping and connecting a low frequency cable” (p. C-4).

Figure C-1 SUB-D assembly steps

aaaaaa

bbbbbb

aaaaaa

bbbbbb

aabb

Cable assembly instructions SUB-D connector

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

C-3

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 280: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Stripping and connecting a low frequency cable

For strippingand connecting a low frequency cable, proceed as follows:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the steps sequentially as shown in the figure below to perform this procedure.

Legend:

*1 The maximum power of the soldering iron is 50 W. If thetemperature is adjustable, it should be adjusted to a maximumof 350°.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure C-2 Low frequency cable

Cable assembly instructions SUB-D connector

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

C-4 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 281: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Coax connector (1.6/5.6)

Description

There are the following type of connectors:

• IMS — type 3320.52.1420.0D5 (45°)

• IMS — type 2630.52.1310.0D5 (Straight)

IMS

Important! Use of the correct tools to ensure a proper connection.

For assembling a coax 1.6/5.6 connector, proceed as follows:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Strip the cable according to the dimensions indicated in the next figure and tin thecenter conductor.

Important! The stripping lengths depend on the used connector type.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Pull the crimp outer ferrule over the stripped cable.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Pull back the cable braid.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Push the center conductor and the dielectric into the connector housing until thedielectric stops.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Solder the inner conductor to the center contact of the connector housing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 After soldering press the cover into the connector body.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 First roll the cable braid over the termination part (inner ferrule) of the connector andpull the crimp outer ferrule over that braid.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Crimp the outer ferrule with a hexagon die 4.6 — AGK 3068 by using the Crimp Tool— AGK 2365.

Cable assembly instructions Coax connector (1.6/5.6)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

C-5

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 282: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Results

Figure C-3 IMS assembly procedure

Cable assembly instructions Coax connector (1.6/5.6)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

C-6 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 283: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Legend:

1 Coax 1.6/5.6 connector (straight) — CC408663482

2 Coax 1.6/5.6 connector (45°)

Crimp tool

Legend:

1 Crimp tool — AGK 2365

2 Hexagon die 4.6 — AGK 3068, or square 1.2

Figure C-4 Crimp tool and die

Cable assembly instructions Coax connector (1.6/5.6)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

C-7

Page 284: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Mounting 4 × 2.5 mm coax (75 Ω) to RJ45 connector

Assembly instructions

Please observe the following assembly instructions:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Mount the teflon tube under the coax braid.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Solder wires to the braid and core wire.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Move the shrink tube over the soldered core wire.

Cable assembly instructions Mounting 4 × 2.5 mm coax (75 Ω) to RJ45 connector

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

C-8 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 285: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Shrink the tube.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Position the wires with a liner block.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Cut the wires to the appropriate length.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Plug the wire ends into an RJ45 housing.

Cable assembly instructions Mounting 4 × 2.5 mm coax (75 Ω) to RJ45 connector

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

C-9

Page 286: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Crimp braid.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Move the cover forward.

RJ45 connector

It is recommended to use an RJ45 connector with EMC shield and strain relief asshown below(CC408899888).

Cable assembly instructions Mounting 4 × 2.5 mm coax (75 Ω) to RJ45 connector

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

C-10 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 287: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Figure C-5 RJ45 connector

Cable assembly instructions Mounting 4 × 2.5 mm coax (75 Ω) to RJ45 connector

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

C-11

Page 288: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview
Page 289: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Numerics

12NC numberThe first nine digits identify the item (comcode), the last three digits identify theversion.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A ADMAdd-Drop Multiplexer

AdministratorSee Lucent OMS System Administrator.

AlarmThe notification (audible or visual) of a significant event. See also Event.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B BDFBBattery Distribution and Fuse Bay

Bit Error Ratio (BER)The ratio of bits received in error to bits sent.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

C CATCATastrophic

CCCross-Connection, Cross-Connect

CCITTSee ITU-T.

CircuitA combination of two transmission channels that permits bidirectional transmission ofsignals between two points to support a single communication.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

GL-1

Page 290: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

CITCraft Interface Terminal

ClientComputer in a computer network that generally offers a user interface to a server. Seealso Server.

COCentral Office

CPCircuit Pack

Craft Interface Terminal (CIT)Local manager for SDH network elements.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

D Data Communication Channel (DCC)The embedded overhead communication channel in the SDH line. The DCC is used forend-to-end communication and maintenance. It carries alarm, control, and statusinformation between network elements in an SDH network.

DCDirect Current

DCNData Communications Network

DDFDigital Distribution Frame

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E EIAElectronic Industries Alliance

Element Management System (EMS)See Integrated Transport Management Subnetwork Controller.

EMCElectroMagnetic Compatibility

EMIElectroMagnetic Interference

EOWEngineering Order Wire

ESDElectroStatic Discharge

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-2 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 291: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

ETSIEuropean Telecommunication Standardisation Institute

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

G Gbit/sGigabits per second

GUIGraphical User Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

I I/OInput/Output

IECInternational Electrotechnical Committee

IEEEInstitute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

Integrated Transport Management Craft Interface Terminal (ITM-CIT)Local manager for SDH network elements in a subnetwork. Also called the CraftInterface Terminal.

ISOInternational Standards Organisation

ITUInternational Telecommunications Union

ITU-RInternational Telecommunications Union - Radio standardization sector. Formerly knownas CCIR: Comité Consultatif International Radio; International Radio ConsultativeCommittee.

ITU-TInternational Telecommunications Union - Telecommunication standardization sector.Formerly known as CCITT: Comité Consultatif International Télégraphique &Téléphonique; International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

L LANLocal Area Network

LEDLight Emitting Diode

Lightguide Build-Out (LBO)An optical attenuator that guarantees the proper signal level and shape at the receiverinput.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

GL-3

Page 292: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

LineTransmission line; refers to a transmission medium, together with the associated highspeed equipment, that are required transport information between two consecutivenetwork elements, one of which originates the line signal and the other terminates theline signal.

LTULine Termination Unit.

Lucent OMS AdministratorSee Lucent OMS System Administrator.

Lucent OMS System AdministratorA user of the Lucent OMS application with system administrator privileges. See alsoUser Privilege.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

M ManagerCapable of issuing network management operations and receiving events. The Managercommunicates with the Agent in the controlled network element.

MDIMiscellaneous Discrete Input

MDOMiscellaneous Discrete Output

MIBThe Management Information Base is the database in the node. The MIB contains theconfiguration data of the node. A copy of each MIB is available in the EMS and iscalled the MIB image. Under normal circumstances, the MIB and MIB image of onenode are synchronized.

MSPMultiplex Section Protection. Provides capability of switching a signal from a workingto a protection section.

MTBFMean Time Between Failures

Multiplexer Section Protection (MSP)Provides capability of switching a signal from a working to a protection section.

Multiplexer Section Shared Protection Ring (MS-SPRING)A protection method used in multiplex line systems.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

N NENetwork Element. The NE is comprised of telecommunication equipment (orgroups/parts of telecommunication equipment) and support equipment that performsnetwork element functions. A Network Element has one or more standard Q-type

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-4 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 293: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

interfaces.

NodeA node or network element is defined as all equipment that is controlled by one systemcontroller.

Non-revertive switchingIn non-revertive switching, there is an active and standby high-speed line, circuit pack,etc. When a protection switch occurs, the standby line, circuit pack, etc., is selectedcausing the old standby line, circuit pack, etc., to be used for the new active line, circuitpack, etc. The original active line, circuit pack, etc., becomes the standby line, circuitpack, etc. This status remains in effect when the fault clears. Therefore, this protectionscheme is “non-revertive” in that there is no switch back to the original status in effectbefore the fault occurred.

NTUNetwork Termination Unit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

O OC-nOptical Carrier, Level n

ODFOptical Distribution Frame

OIOptical Interface

OperatorA user of the Lucent OMS application with operator privileges. See also User Privilege.

OSOperations System - A central computer-based system that is used to provide operations,administration and maintenance functions.

OSIOpen Systems Interconnection

OW(Engineering) Order Wire

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

P PathA logical connection between one termination point at which a standard format for asignal at the given rate is assembled and from which the signal is transmitted, andanother termination point at which the received standard frame format for the signal isdisassembled.

PCPersonal Computer

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

GL-5

Page 294: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

PCBPrinted Circuit Board

PDHPlesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PDPPower Distribution Panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Q Q-LANThin Ethernet LAN (10BaseT) that connects the manager to gateway network elementsso that management information can be exchanged between network elements andmanagement systems.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

S SCSquare coupled Connector

SDHSynchronous Digital Hierarchy. Definition of the degree of control of the various clocksin a digital network over other clocks.

SDSLSymmetrical single pair high bit rate Digital Subscriber Line (name used by ETSI)

SFPSmall Form-Factor Pluggable Optics

SHShort Haul

SHDSLSingle-pair High-speed Digital Subscriber Line (name used by ITU-T)

STMSynchronous Transport Module Building block of SDH.

SupervisorA user of the Lucent OMS application with supervisor privileges. See also UserPrivilege.

System AdministratorA user of the computer system on which the Lucent OMS application can be installed.See also User Privilege.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

T TCP/IPTransmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-6 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 295: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

TIATelecommunications Industry Association

TMNTelecommunications Management Network

TributaryA signal of a specific rate (2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, VC12, VC3, VC4, STM-1 orSTM-4) that may be added to or dropped from a line signal.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

U UTPUnshielded Twisted Pair

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

GL-7

Page 296: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview
Page 297: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

Index

Numerics

2H subrack

installation,3-33

6H subrack

installation,3-8

.............................................................

A AMU 1m/1o

card mounting,3-41

card retraction,3-43

dimensions,3-25

fan mounting to horizontalsubrack,3-46

fan mounting to verticalsubrack,3-45

horizontal rack mounting,3-32

layout, 3-26

technical data,3-25

vertical rack mounting,3-30

voltage range,3-25

weight, 3-25

AMU 2m/4o

card mounting,3-18

card retraction,3-19

dimensions,3-2

fan mounting,3-23

fan replacement,3-24

layout, 3-3

rack mounting,3-6

technical data,3-2

voltage range,3-2

weight, 3-2

.............................................................

B barred-hand symbol,1-12

.............................................................

C Cable assembly,C-1

cable specifications,B-1

cabling

easy MDI cable,4-18

EOP4_E132 andEOP4_E132_75 optioncards,4-53

EPL4_E132_75 option card,4-51

EPL4_E14 option card,4-49

Cabling

ESW4_E14 option card,4-53

cabling

fiber cables,4-61

ground wiring,4-10

ITM-CIT cable, 4-28

MDIO cable, 4-15

PI-E1/63 option card,4-35

PI-E1/63_75 option card,4-35

power cables,4-5

Q-LAN/G-LAN cable, 4-26

routing rules,4-1

SFP-155E cable,4-57

SI-14/8 option card,4-56

station clock cable,4-21

USB cable,4-33

V.11 cable,4-31

X16DS1 option card,4-41

X2DS3-V2 option card,4-44

X2E3-V2/E3/DS3_E14option card,4-40

X4IP-V2 option card,4-46

X8PL option card,4-46

CE mark,1-13

cleaning of optical connectors,A-7

completion form,9-4

connection verification test,8-4

Conventions,xxvii

converter (AC/DC),2-2

converter AC/DC,4-8

.............................................................

D Danger sources,1-1

dimensions

AMU 1m/1o, 3-25

AMU 2m/4o, 3-2

Documentation set,xxvii

.............................................................

E electrostatic discharge,1-11,2-17

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

IN-1

Page 298: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

electrostatic protection,1-12

Entry checklist

Link testing, 3-1

entry checklist

NE provisioning and standalone installation test,2-1

physical and powerinstallation,1-1

environmental requirements,2-16

EPL option card test,7-16

ESDSee: Electrostatic discharge

ESPSee: Electrostatic protection

exit checklist

link acceptance test,8-8

NE provisioning and standalone installation test,7-22

physical and powerinstallation,5-6

.............................................................

F fans, 2-13

fast download application,6-6

fiber cleaning,A-7

final checklist,9-3

.............................................................

G grounding,4-10

.............................................................

I installation of an AM/AMSoption card,3-21

installation steps,2-20

ITM-CIT

cable connection,6-9

installation procedure,6-3

requirements,2-19, 6-3

.............................................................

L Laser classification,1-9

Laser safety guidelines,1-8

.............................................................

M main card equipment protectiontest, 7-10

MIB provisioning, 6-21

.............................................................

N NE date and time,6-14

NE login procedure,6-11

NE provisioning

MIB, 6-21

NE date and time,6-14

node creation,6-16

slot provisioning,6-19

NE software download,6-7,A-3

node creation,6-16

.............................................................

O optical circuit packspecifications,4-59

optical connectors

specifications,4-59

types,4-58

optical received power test,8-2

option cards

available option cards,2-11

handling instructions,2-18

.............................................................

P PDH/DSx option card test,7-13

physical installation check,5-2

pin assignment

DS1 cable (X16DS1),4-41

E1 cable (PI-E1/63 andPI-E1/63_75),4-35

easy MDI cable,4-18

ITM-CIT cable, 4-28

LAN cable - E/FE,4-46

LAN cable - GE,4-47

MDIO cable, 4-15

power cables,4-5

Q-LAN/G-LAN cable, 4-26

station clock cable,4-21

STM-1 cable (SFP-155E),4-57

V.11 cable,4-31

power consumption,3-2, 3-25

Power Distribution Panel (PDP)

grounding,4-10

power failure,A-2

power supply,1-11, 2-2

power supply safetyinstructions,1-11

powering the system,5-5

.............................................................

R racks,2-2

removing the SFP modules,A-9

RoHS Directive,1-13

routing rules,4-1

.............................................................

S SFPSee: Small Form-Factor

Pluggable Optics

SFP modules,A-9

slot provisioning,6-19

Small Form-Factor PluggableOptics (SFPs),4-58

Small Formfactor PluggableOptics (SFPs),2-8

software download failure,A-3

Sources of danger,1-1

STM-1/STM-4 port connectiontest, 7-5

subrack

2H, 3-25

6H, 3-2

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IN-2 Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Page 299: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview

subrack 1m/1o

installation,3-29

supply voltage test,5-5

switched Ethernet option cardtest, 7-19

switching on the supplyvoltage,5-5

.............................................................

T test

cable connections,5-3

connection verification,8-4

EPL option card,7-16

main card equipmentprotection,7-10

optical received power,8-2

PDH/DSx option card,7-13

physical installation,5-2

Test

STM-1/STM-4 portconnection,7-5

test

supply voltage,5-5

switched Ethernet optioncard, 7-19

transmission stability,8-6

test equipment,2-20

tools, 2-19

transmission stability test,8-6

tributary cards

available tributary cards,2-11

handling instructions,2-18

troubleshooting

fiber cleaning,A-7

power failure,A-2

software download failure,A-3

.............................................................

W warning symbols,1-4

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

365-312-848R6.0 Issue 2 February 2017

Nokia – Proprietary See notice on first page.

IN-3

Page 300: 1655 Access Multiplexer Universal ... - Nokia Networks · PDF fileInstallation Guide 365-312-848R6.0 CC109686931 Issue 2 ... Node creation ... B Cable specifications Overview